BSC6900 GU Site Maintenance Guide(V900R014C00_07)(PDF)-En

BSC6900 GUV900R014C00

Site Maintenance Guide

Issue 07

Date 2013-06-28

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 07 (2013-06-28) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

About This Document

PurposeThis document describes how to perform the hardware maintenance tasks after the BSC6900commissioning, to maintain the hardware operation of the BSC6900. The maintenance tasksinvolve powering on/off the BSC6900 cabinet, replacing components, and routine maintenancetasks such as checking LEDs and monitoring the site environment.

Product VersionThe following table lists the product version related to the document.

Product Name Product Version

BSC6900 V900R014C00

Intended AudienceThis document is intended for:

l Network planning engineersl System engineersl Field engineers

Organization1 Changes in the BSC6900 GU Site Maintenance Guide

This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 GU Site Maintenance Guide.

2 Site Maintenance Tool Preparations

This section lists the tools required for BSC6900 site maintenance. These tools must be placedin the equipment room or at nearby places for easy access.

3 High-Risk Hardware Operations

BSC6900 GUSite Maintenance Guide About This Document


ii

High-risk hardware operations include installing boards and replacing boards, both of whichhave the same impact. Exercise cautious when deciding to install or replace a board because thisoperation may interrupt services or result in a system power outage. Perform this operation assoon as possible when the traffic is light to reduce the impact on the system.

4 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items

This chapter describes the routine hardware maintenance items of the BSC6900. Different itemsrequire different maintenance methods.

5 Powering On/Off the BSC6900

This chapter describes how to power on and power off the BSC6900. The following is described:the distribution of the power switches, powering on the BSC6900 cabinet, powering off theBSC6900 cabinet in a normal situation, and powering off the BSC6900 cabinet in case ofemergencies.

6 Cleaning the Fan Box

This chapter describes how to clean a fan box. To ensure stability and reliability of the equipment,the maintenance personnel should clean each fan box (including the fan boxes in the servicesubracks and the fan boxes in the independent fan subrack) regularly, preferably once everyyear.

7 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters

This chapter describes how to clean and replace an air filter. The air filter protects the boardsand the BSC6900 from dust. If an air filter is damaged, you must replace it with a new one intime.

8 Replacing Boards and Modules

This chapeter describes how to replace boards of the same hardware version and modules in theBSC6900 cabinet, which involves replacing the boards and modules, acknowledging asuccessful replacement, and handling of the faulty boards. Each section provides an estimatedtime for the replacement of the board as a reference.

9 Replacing the Cables

This chapter describes how to replace the Ethernet cable, E1/T1 cable, optical cable, clock signalcable, cable to the alarm box, and power distribution box monitoring cable. This chapter alsodescribes how to check that the cables are successfully replaced and how to handle the faultycables.

10 LEDs on the Boards

This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.

11 DIP Switches on Components

This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.

12 BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record

This chapter describes the BSC6900 site maintenance record.

ConventionsSymbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.



iii

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level or medium level of riskwhich, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if notavoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if notavoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or savetime.

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.

General Conventions

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.

Command Conventions

The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.


Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.



iv


{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.


Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations

The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A meansthe two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations

The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without movingthe pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously andquickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move thepointer to a certain position.



v

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Changes in the BSC6900 GU Site Maintenance Guide..........................................................1

2 Site Maintenance Tool Preparations..........................................................................................5

3 High-Risk Hardware Operations...............................................................................................6

4 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items...................................................................................134.1 Equipment Room Maintenance Items..........................................................................................................................144.2 Maintaining the Power Supply and Grounding Systems..............................................................................................144.3 Cabinet Maintenance Items..........................................................................................................................................164.4 Cable Maintenance Items.............................................................................................................................................17

5 Powering On/Off the BSC6900.................................................................................................195.1 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common Power Distribution Box..................................................................205.2 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power PDB............................................................................................225.3 Powering On the Cabinet..............................................................................................................................................235.4 Powering Off the Cabinet in a Normal Situation.........................................................................................................265.5 Powering Off the Cabinet in Emergency Cases...........................................................................................................27

6 Cleaning the Fan Box..................................................................................................................28

7 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters...................................................................................307.1 Position of the Air Filters.............................................................................................................................................317.2 Cleaning the Air Filter at the Bottom of the N68E-22 Cabinet....................................................................................327.3 Cleaning the Air Filter on the Inner Side of the Cabinet Door.....................................................................................347.4 Replacing the Air Filters...............................................................................................................................................35

8 Replacing Boards and Modules................................................................................................378.1 Strategy on Replacing Legacy Components in an Upgrade Scenario..........................................................................418.2 Procedure for Replacing a Board..................................................................................................................................418.2.1 Removing a Board.....................................................................................................................................................418.2.2 Inserting a Board.......................................................................................................................................................458.3 Replacing an AEUa Board...........................................................................................................................................478.4 Replacing an AOUa Board...........................................................................................................................................508.5 Replacing an AOUc Board...........................................................................................................................................548.6 Replacing a DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf Board.......................................................................................57

BSC6900 GUSite Maintenance Guide Contents


vi

8.7 Replacing an EIUa Board.............................................................................................................................................598.8 Replacing an FG2a Board.............................................................................................................................................638.9 Replacing an FG2c Board.............................................................................................................................................668.10 Replacing an FG2d Board..........................................................................................................................................708.11 Replacing a GCUa/GCGa Board................................................................................................................................748.12 Replacing a GOUa Board...........................................................................................................................................768.13 Replacing a GOUc Board...........................................................................................................................................808.14 Replacing a GOUd Board...........................................................................................................................................848.15 Replacing an MDMC Board.......................................................................................................................................878.16 Replacing a NIUa Board.............................................................................................................................................898.17 Replacing an OIUa Board...........................................................................................................................................918.18 Replacing an OMU Board..........................................................................................................................................958.18.1 Checking OMU Status Before Replacing an OMU Board......................................................................................968.18.2 Scenario: Replacing an OMU Board in Single-OMU Mode.................................................................................1018.18.3 Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU in Dual-System Mode............................................................................1288.18.4 Scenario: Replacing OMUa or OMUb Boards with OMUc Boards.....................................................................1428.18.5 Scenario: Replacing Active and Standby OMUs in Dual-System Mode..............................................................1608.18.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board...................................................................................................1698.19 Replacing a PAMU Board........................................................................................................................................1738.20 Replacing a PEUa Board..........................................................................................................................................1768.21 Replacing a POUa Board..........................................................................................................................................1808.22 Replacing a POUc Board..........................................................................................................................................1848.23 Replace an SAUa/SAUc Board................................................................................................................................1888.24 Replacing an SCUa/SCUb Board.............................................................................................................................1938.25 Replacing a TNUa Board.........................................................................................................................................1968.26 Replacing a UOIa Board...........................................................................................................................................1998.27 Replacing a UOIc Board...........................................................................................................................................2028.28 Replacing an XPUa/SPUa Board.............................................................................................................................2058.29 Replacing an XPUb/SPUb Board.............................................................................................................................2088.30 Replacing a WOPB Board........................................................................................................................................2118.31 Replacing a Subrack.................................................................................................................................................2128.32 Replacing the Independent Fan Subrack..................................................................................................................2168.33 Replacing the Power Distribution Box.....................................................................................................................2188.34 Replacing the Fan Box.............................................................................................................................................2248.35 Replacing the Pluggable Optical Module.................................................................................................................2278.36 Replacing an Optical Splitter/Combiner...................................................................................................................2308.37 Replacing the KVM..................................................................................................................................................2328.38 Replacing the LAN Switch.......................................................................................................................................2348.39 Replacing the GBAM...............................................................................................................................................235

9 Replacing the Cables................................................................................................................2429.1 Replacing a Power Cable............................................................................................................................................2449.2 Replacing an E1/T1 Cable..........................................................................................................................................246



vii

9.3 Replacing an Optical Cable........................................................................................................................................2489.4 Replacing an Ethernet Cable......................................................................................................................................2509.5 Replacing a Clock Signal Cable.................................................................................................................................2529.6 Replacing a Y-Shaped Clock Cable...........................................................................................................................2549.7 Replacing an Inter-TNUa Cable.................................................................................................................................2559.8 Replacing an EMU RS485 Communication Cable....................................................................................................2579.9 Replacing a Signal Cable to the Alarm Box...............................................................................................................2589.10 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box.................................................................2609.11 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack..............................................................2619.12 Replacing an SFP+ High-Speed Cable.....................................................................................................................262

10 LEDs on the Boards.................................................................................................................26510.1 LEDs on the AEUa Board........................................................................................................................................26810.2 LEDs on the AOUa Board........................................................................................................................................26810.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board........................................................................................................................................26910.4 LEDs on the DPUa Board........................................................................................................................................26910.5 LEDs on the DPUb Board........................................................................................................................................27010.6 LEDs on the DPUc Board........................................................................................................................................27110.7 LEDs on the DPUd Board........................................................................................................................................27110.8 LEDs on the DPUe Board........................................................................................................................................27210.9 LEDs on the EIUa Board..........................................................................................................................................27210.10 LEDs on the FG2a Board.......................................................................................................................................27310.11 LEDs on the FG2c Board.......................................................................................................................................27410.12 LEDs on the FG2d Board.......................................................................................................................................27510.13 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board...........................................................................................................................27510.14 LEDs on the GOUa Board......................................................................................................................................27610.15 LEDs on the GOUc Board......................................................................................................................................27710.16 LEDs on the GOUd Board......................................................................................................................................27710.17 LEDs on the MDMC Board....................................................................................................................................27810.18 LEDs on the NIUa Board.......................................................................................................................................27910.19 LEDs on the OIUa Board.......................................................................................................................................27910.20 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board.........................................................................................................................28010.21 LEDs on the PAMU Board.....................................................................................................................................28110.22 LEDs on the PEUa Board.......................................................................................................................................28110.23 LEDs on the POUa Board......................................................................................................................................28210.24 LEDs on the POUc Board......................................................................................................................................28310.25 LEDs on the SAUa Board......................................................................................................................................28310.26 LEDs on the SAUc Board......................................................................................................................................28410.27 LEDs on the SCUa Board.......................................................................................................................................28510.28 LEDs on the SCUb Board......................................................................................................................................28610.29 LEDs on the SPUa Board.......................................................................................................................................28710.30 LEDs on the SPUb Board.......................................................................................................................................28810.31 LEDs on the TNUa Board......................................................................................................................................288



viii

10.32 LEDs on the UOIa Board.......................................................................................................................................28910.33 LEDs on the UOIc Board.......................................................................................................................................290

11 DIP Switches on Components.............................................................................................. 29111.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack.......................................................................................................................................29211.2 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board............................................................................................................................29411.3 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board...........................................................................................................................29711.4 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board.............................................................................................................................29911.5 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board............................................................................................................................30211.6 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board.............................................................................................................................30211.7 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board............................................................................................................................30311.8 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board...............................................................................................................................30611.9 DIP Switches on the POUa Board............................................................................................................................308

12 BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record...................................................................................... 311



ix

1 Changes in the BSC6900 GU SiteMaintenance Guide

This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 GU Site Maintenance Guide.

07 (2013-06-28)

This is the seventh commercial release of V900R014C00.

Compared with issue 06 (2013-04-15), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with issue 06 (2013-04-15), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

Scenario: Replacing Two OMUa or OMUbBoards with Two OMUc Boards

The steps is optimized.

Compared with issue 06 (2013-04-15), this issue does not exclude any topics.

06 (2013-04-15)

This is the sixth commercial release of V900R014C00.



Content Description

8.39 Replacing the GBAM The steps of Replace the GBAM withan OMU board is optimized.


BSC6900 GUSite Maintenance Guide 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GU Site Maintenance Guide


1

05 (2013-03-25)

This is the fifth commercial release of V900R014C00.



Content Description

Scenario: Replacing Two OMUa or OMUbBoards with Two OMUc Boards

The steps using USB installation disk isdeleted and modified to installmanually.


04 (2012-12-31)

This is the fourth commercial release of V900R014C00.



Content Description

8.8 Replacing an FG2a Board8.9 Replacing an FG2c Board8.10 Replacing an FG2d Board8.12 Replacing a GOUa Board8.13 Replacing a GOUc Board8.14 Replacing a GOUd Board8.20 Replacing a PEUa Board8.21 Replacing a POUa Board8.22 Replacing a POUc Board

The step that query the IPPATH statusof board and block the IP path to bereplacing is added.


03 (2012-11-07)

This is the third commercial release of V900R014C00.





2

Content Description

Scenario: Replacing Two OMUa or OMUbBoards with Two OMUc BoardsScenario: Replacing an OMUa or OMUb Boardwith Two OMUc BoardsScenario: Replacing an OMUa or OMUb Boardwith an OMUc Board

The prerequisite is modified.


02 (2012-08-30)

This is the second commercial release of V900R014C00.



Content Description

8.18 Replacing an OMU Board The procedure for installing theoperating system patch and upgradingthe Ethernet adapter drive is added.


01 (2012-04-26)

This is the first commercial release of V900R014C00.

Compared with issue Draft A (2012-02-15), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with issue Draft A (2012-02-15), this issue does not incorporates any changes.

Compared with issue Draft A (2012-02-15), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Draft A (2012-02-15)

This is the Draft A release of V900R014C00.

Compared with issue 04 (2012-01-05) of V900R013C00, this issue includes the following newtopics:

l 8.23 Replace an SAUa/SAUc Board

Compared with issue 04 (2012-01-05) of V900R013C000, this issue incorporates the followingchanges:



3

Content Description

8.31 Replacing a Subrack The procedure for replacing a subrackis modified.

Compared with issue 04 (2012-01-05) of V900R013C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.



4

2 Site Maintenance Tool Preparations

This section lists the tools required for BSC6900 site maintenance. These tools must be placedin the equipment room or at nearby places for easy access.

Table 2-1 lists the maintenance items and tools.

Table 2-1 Maintenance items and tools for site maintenance

Item Tools

Cleaning the fanbox

ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, vacuum cleaner, ESD soft brush,and clean cotton cloth

Cleaning the airfilters

ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and clean cotton cloth

Replacing a board ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver, ESD boxor bag, clean cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner

Replacing the fanbox, powerdistribution box,or subrack

ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver, ESD boxor bag, diagonal pliers, dry cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner

Replacing thecables

ESD wrist strap, Ethernet meter, Ethernet cable pliers, flat-headscrewdriver, clean cotton cloth, fiber cleaner, ESD gloves, and diagonalpliers

Tools summary forthe BSC6900 sitemaintenance

ESD gloves, ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-headscrewdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, fiber cleaner,Ethernet cable tester, Ethernet cable pliers, vacuum cleaner, ESD softbrush, and diagonal pliers

BSC6900 GUSite Maintenance Guide 2 Site Maintenance Tool Preparations


5

3 High-Risk Hardware Operations

High-risk hardware operations include installing boards and replacing boards, both of whichhave the same impact. Exercise cautious when deciding to install or replace a board because thisoperation may interrupt services or result in a system power outage. Perform this operation assoon as possible when the traffic is light to reduce the impact on the system.

High-Risk Operations Impact

8.3 Replacing an AEUaBoard

l Replacing the standby AEU has no adverse impact on thesystem. When no standby AEU is in position, replacingthe board disrupts services carried on this board.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connectedthrough only the AEU board, the ongoing servicesbetween the BSC6900 and its peer equipment aredisrupted when you replace the AEU board.

8.4 Replacing an AOUaBoard8.5 Replacing an AOUcBoard

l Replacing the standby AOU has no adverse impact on thesystem. If no standby AOU is in position, replacing theboard disrupts services carried on this board.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connectedthrough only the AOU board, the ongoing servicesbetween the BSC6900 and its peer equipment aredisrupted when you replace the AOU board.

8.6 Replacing a DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf Board

Replacing the DPU board interrupts all the services carriedon the board.

8.7 Replacing an EIUaBoard

l Replacing the standby EIU has no adverse impact on thesystem. Replacing the EIU board that worksindependently, however, disrupts services carried on thisboard.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connectedthrough only the EIU board, the ongoing services betweenthe BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted whenyou replace the EIU board.

BSC6900 GUSite Maintenance Guide 3 High-Risk Hardware Operations


6


8.8 Replacing an FG2aBoard8.9 Replacing an FG2cBoard8.10 Replacing an FG2dBoard

l If the FG2 board is standby and the data over the port onthe FG2 board are backed up, replacing the standby FG2board has no adverse impact on the system.

l When the FG2 boards work in backup mode and the portswork in load sharing mode, replacing the standby FG2board disrupts part of services if the traffic over the portsexceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active board.When the FG2 boards work in backup mode withindependent ports, replacing the standby FG2 boardinterrupts all the services carried on the standby board.

l Replacing an FG2 board that works independentlyinterrupts all the services on the board.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connectedthrough only the FG2 board, the ongoing servicesbetween the BSC6900 and its peer equipment aredisrupted when you replace the FG2 board.

8.11 Replacing a GCUa/GCGa Board

Replacing a standby GCU/GCG board does not affect thesystem. Replacing a GCU/GCG board that worksindependently interrupts services carried on the BSC6900.

8.12 Replacing a GOUaBoard8.13 Replacing a GOUcBoard8.14 Replacing a GOUdBoard

l If the GOU board is standby and the data over the port onthe GOU board are backed up, replacing the standby GOUboard has no adverse impact on the system.

l When the GOU boards work in backup mode and the portswork in load sharing mode, replacing the standby GOUboard disrupts part of services if the total traffic over theports exceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the activeboard. When the GOU boards work in backup mode withindependent ports, replacing the standby GOU boardinterrupts all the services carried on the standby board.

l Replacing a GOU board that works independentlydisrupts the services on that board.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connectedthrough only the GOU board, the ongoing servicesbetween the BSC6900 and its peer equipment aredisrupted when you replace the GOU board.

8.15 Replacing an MDMCBoard

Replacing the MDMC board interrupts the monitoring on thecommon PDB.

8.16 Replacing a NIUaBoard

Replacing the NIU board interrupts all the services carriedon the board.



7


8.17 Replacing an OIUaBoard

l Replacing the standby OIU board has no adverse impacton the system. When no standby OIU board is in position,replacing the board disrupts services carried on this board.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connectedthrough only the OIU board, the ongoing servicesbetween the BSC6900 and its peer equipment aredisrupted when you replace the OIU board.

8.18 Replacing an OMUBoard

Replacing the OMU board interrupts all the services carriedon the board.

8.19 Replacing a PAMUBoard

Replacing the PAMU board interrupts the monitoring on theBSC6900 PDB.

8.20 Replacing a PEUaBoard

l Replacing the standby PEU has no adverse impact on thesystem. Replacing the PEU board that worksindependently, however, disrupts services carried on thisboard.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connectedthrough only the PEU board, the ongoing servicesbetween the BSC6900 and its peer equipment aredisrupted when you replace the PEU board.

8.21 Replacing a POUaBoard8.22 Replacing a POUcBoard

l Replacing the standby POU has no adverse impact on thesystem. Replacing the POU board that worksindependently, however, disrupts services carried by thesubrack that houses the board.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connectedthrough only the POU board, the ongoing servicesbetween the BSC6900 and its peer equipment aredisrupted when you replace the POU board.

8.23 Replace an SAUa/SAUc Board

Replacing the SAU board that works independently willinterrupt the communication between the host boards and theSAU, which results in system data loss.

8.24 Replacing an SCUa/SCUb Board

l Replacing the standby SCU board decreases the internalswitching capacity and has no impact on services.

l If no standby board is in position, replacing the SCUboard in the MPS resets all boards in the BSC6900 andinterrupts all the ongoing services in the BSC6900.

l If no standby board is in position, replacing the SCUboard in the EPS/TCS resets all boards in the subrack andinterrupts all the ongoing services. In addition, thecommunication between the EPS/TCS and the MPS isinterrupted.



8


8.26 Replacing a UOIaBoard8.27 Replacing a UOIcBoard

l Replacing the standby UOI board has no adverse impacton the system. When no standby UOI board is in position,replacing the board disrupts services carried on this board.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connectedthrough only the UOI board, the ongoing servicesbetween the BSC6900 and its peer equipment aredisrupted when you replace the UOI board.

8.25 Replacing a TNUaBoard

l Replacing the standby TNU board decreases the internalswitching capacity and has no impact on the ongoingservices.

l When no standby board is in position, replacing the TNUboard in the MPS resets all the other boards in the MPSand interrupts all the ongoing services in the subrack.

l When no standby board is in position, replacing the TNUboard in the EPS/TCS resets all the other boards in theEPS/TCS and interrupts all the ongoing services in thesubrack. In addition, the communication between theEPS/TCS and the MPS is interrupted.

8.28 Replacing an XPUa/SPUa Board

l Replacing the standby main control XPU/SPU board hasno adverse impact on the services in the system.Replacing the main control XPU/SPU board that worksindependently, however, disrupts services carried in thesubrack.

l Replacing the standby non main control XPU/SPU boardhas no adverse impact on the services in the system.Replacing the non main control XPU/SPU board thatworks independently, however, disrupts services carriedin the board.

8.30 Replacing a WOPBBoard

Replacing the WOPB board temporarily makes theovervoltage protection ineffective.

8.31 Replacing a Subrack l Replacing the subrack interrupts services carried on theboards in this subrack.

l Replace a subrack with caution quickly when the trafficis low, for example, in the early morning.

l Three persons are required to replace a subrack due to theweight.

8.32 Replacing theIndependent Fan Subrack

l Do not push the independent fan subrack completely intothe cabinet, that is, certain space should be reserved forinstalling cables.

l Pay attention to the mounting bar and guide rails wheninstalling cables.



9


8.33 Replacing the PowerDistribution Box

l Replacing the power distribution box in the EPR/TCRinterrupts all the services carried by the EPR/TCR.

l Replacing the power distribution box in the MPRinterrupts all the services carried by the entire BSC6900.

8.34 Replacing the Fan Box Replacing the fan assembly severely affects the heatdissipation. You are advised to replace the fan assemblywithin one minute. Otherwise, the boards will be damageddue to high temperature.

8.35 Replacing thePluggable Optical Module

l Replacing the pluggable optical module on the standbyoptical interface board does not affect the system.

l If there is no standby board in position, replacing thepluggable optical module on the active optical interfaceboard interrupts all the services carried on the board.

8.36 Replacing an OpticalSplitter/Combiner

l When replacing the optical splitter/combiner, do not lookinto the optical port without eye protection.

l Replacing an optical splitter/combiner disrupts ongoingservices on the corresponding interface boards.Therefore, replace it in low traffic hours, for example, atmidnight.

8.37 Replacing the KVM When replacing the KVM, one cannot operate the GBAMthrough the GUI.

8.38 Replacing the LANSwitch

Replacing the LAN switch disrupts the communicationbetween the LMT/M2000 and the GBAM.

8.39 Replacing the GBAM l Replacing the GBAM disrupts the communicationbetween the GBAM and the host boards.

l Replacing the GBAM disrupts the communicationbetween the LMT/M2000 and the BSC6900. In this case,you cannot maintain the BSC6900 or collect the alarminformation. The BSC6900 host boards, however, worknormally during the replacement of the GBAM.

8.38 Replacing the LANSwitch

Replacing the LAN switch disrupts the communicationbetween the LMT/M2000 and the GBAM.

8.39 Replacing the GBAM l Replacing the GBAM disrupts the communicationbetween the GBAM and the host boards.

l Replacing the GBAM disrupts the communicationbetween the LMT/M2000 and the BSC6900. In this case,you cannot maintain the BSC6900 or collect the alarminformation. The BSC6900 host boards, however, worknormally during the replacement of the GBAM.



10


9.1 Replacing a PowerCable

l During the replacement of the power cable between thePDF and the power distribution box, if single-inputexternal power is supplied, the replacement causes thesystem to power off and interrupts ongoing services. Ifdual-input external power is supplied, the replacementdoes not affect the system but triggers a power failurealarm.

l During the replacement of the power cable between thepower distribution box and the subrack, if single-inputpower is supplied, the replacement causes the subrack topower off and interrupts ongoing services carried on theboards in the subrack. If dual-input power is supplied, thereplacement does not affect the system.

l During the replacement of the power cable between thepower distribution box and the independent fan subrack,if single-input power is supplied, the replacement causesthe subrack to power off and affects the system heatdissipation. If dual-input power is supplied, thereplacement does not affect the system.

l Before replacing a power cable, check the power supplymode (for example, single input or dual input) of thepower cable and notify of the customers. For single-inputpower supply, be prepared for possible serviceinterruption.

9.2 Replacing an E1/T1Cable

l Replacing the E1/T1 cable disrupts the services carriedover the E1/T1 cable.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer end are connected throughonly the E1/T1 cable, all the services between theBSC6900 and its peer end are disrupted during thereplacement.

9.3 Replacing an OpticalCable

l Do not look directly at connectors of the fiber optic cableswhen replacing the fiber optic cable. The beam may hurtyour eyes.

l When the BSC6900 and other NEs are connected inoptical port backup mode, replacing one fiber optic cabledoes not affect system services. However, thereplacement interrupts all the services carried on thiscable in other connection mode.

l When the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connectedthrough only the fiber optic cable, replacing this cableinterrupts all the services between the BSC6900 and itspeer NEs.



11


9.4 Replacing an EthernetCable

l Replacing the Ethernet cable connected to the LMTinterrupts the communication between the LMT and theOMU.

l The Port Trunking function is used in the interconnectionports on the inter-subrack SCU board. Replacing oneEthernet cable does not affect the system.

l For the interface board, if the BSC6900 is connected tothe peer equipment through only the Ethernet cable,replacing this cable interrupts all the services between theBSC6900 and its peer NEs.

l The OMUEOMU board is configured with a pair ofEthernet cables for backup. Replacing one of them doesnot affect the system.

9.6 Replacing a Y-ShapedClock Cable

Replacing a Y-shaped clock cable may cause a clock-relatedalarm and an automatic switchover between the active andstandby SCU boards.

9.7 Replacing an Inter-TNUa Cable

Replacing the inter-TNU cable disrupts the TDM switchingservices between the two subracks that are connected by theinter-TNU cable.



12

4 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the routine hardware maintenance items of the BSC6900. Different itemsrequire different maintenance methods.

4.1 Equipment Room Maintenance ItemsThis section describes the maintenance items in the BSC6900 equipment room. The itemsinclude the ambience alarm, anti-theft device, door and window, temperature, humidity, indoorair conditioner, and dustproof condition.

4.2 Maintaining the Power Supply and Grounding SystemsThis section describes the maintenance items of the BSC6900 power supply and the groundingsystem. The maintenance items consist of power cables, voltage, PGND cables, componentsinside the cabinet, earth resistance, batteries, and rectifier.

4.3 Cabinet Maintenance ItemsThis section describes the maintenance items of the BSC6900 cabinet. The maintenance itemsconsist of fans, air filters, cabinet surface, locks and doors of cabinet, cabinet cleanliness, fanbox cleanliness, ESD wrist strap, cabinet components, and idle optical ports on boards.

4.4 Cable Maintenance ItemsThis section describes the cable maintenance items. The maintenance items consist of cablelabels, connectors and sockets, connection of E1/T1 cables, connection of Ethernet cables, andconnection of optical cables.

BSC6900 GUSite Maintenance Guide 4 Routine Hardware Maintenance Items


13

4.1 Equipment Room Maintenance ItemsThis section describes the maintenance items in the BSC6900 equipment room. The itemsinclude the ambience alarm, anti-theft device, door and window, temperature, humidity, indoorair conditioner, and dustproof condition.

Table 4-1 lists the maintenance items of the equipment room.

Table 4-1 Maintenance items of the equipment room

Item Interval Operation Guide ReferenceStandard

Alarms onequipment roomenvironment

Daily Check whether powersupply alarms, firealarms, or smokealarms are generated.

No power supplyalarms, fire alarms, orsmoke alarms arereported.

Check anti-theft nets,equipment roomdoors, and windows

Weekly Check whether theanti-theft nets, doors,and windows areintact.

The anti-theft device,door, and window arein good condition.

Check roomtemperature

Daily Check thetemperature indicatorin the equipmentroom.

The temperature isbetween 15°C and 30°C.

Check roomhumidity

Daily Check the humidityindicator in theequipment room.

The humidity isbetween 40% and65%.

Check indoor airconditioner

Weekly Check the runningstatus of the airconditioner.

The air conditionerworks properly. Thetemperature set on theair conditioner isconsistent with thaton the thermometer.

Check dustproofcondition

Weekly Check the equipmentshell, equipmentinterior, floor, anddesktop.

The cabinet surface isclean, and the cabinetinterior is dustfree.

4.2 Maintaining the Power Supply and Grounding SystemsThis section describes the maintenance items of the BSC6900 power supply and the groundingsystem. The maintenance items consist of power cables, voltage, PGND cables, componentsinside the cabinet, earth resistance, batteries, and rectifier.

Table 4-2 lists the maintenance items of the power supply and grounding systems.



14

Table 4-2 Maintenance items of the power supply and grounding systems

Item Interval Operation Guide Reference Standard

Power cables Monthly orquarterly

Check all the power cablesbetween the power supplysystem and the powerdistribution box of thecabinet.

l The power cables are notaged.

l The PGND cables aresecurely connected. Theconnection points are notcorroded.

Voltage Monthly orquarterly

Measure the voltage of thepower supply using amultimeter.

The voltage of the powersupply is within the standardvoltage range. For details,refer to TechnicalSpecifications of the Cabinet.

PGND cables Monthly orquarterly

Check all the PGNDcables and ground bars.

l The PGND cables are notaged.


l The ground bars are notcorroded. Proper anti-corrosion measures aretaken.

Componentsinside thecabinet

Monthly orquarterly

Check the connectionterminals and captivescrews of all the PGNDcables.

l The PGND cables are notaged.


l The connection terminalsand captive screws aresecurely and correctlyconnected, and they arenot corroded.

Earthresistance

Monthly orquarterly

Use an electric earthresistance tester tomeasure the earthresistance and keep arecord.

The grounding resistance isless than or equal to 10 ohms.



15


Batteries andrectifier

Yearly Check the batteries andrectifier of the powersupply system in eachpiece of equipment room.

l The batteries are normal.There is no batteryleakage, swelling, orcorrosion.

l The capacity of allbatteries meets thestandard requirementsand the batteries arecorrectly connected.

l The rectifier meets therequired specifications.

4.3 Cabinet Maintenance ItemsThis section describes the maintenance items of the BSC6900 cabinet. The maintenance itemsconsist of fans, air filters, cabinet surface, locks and doors of cabinet, cabinet cleanliness, fanbox cleanliness, ESD wrist strap, cabinet components, and idle optical ports on boards.

Table 4-3 lists the maintenance items of the BSC6900 cabinet.

Table 4-3 BSC6900 cabinet maintenance items


Fans Weekly ormonthly

Check the running state ofthe fans.

The fan works properlywithout making abnormalsounds.

Air filters Quarterly Check the air filters ofeach cabinet.

The air filters are dust-freeand damage-free. Clean thedirty air filter according to7 Cleaning and Replacingthe Air Filters. Replacethe damaged air filteraccording to 7.4 Replacingthe Air Filters.

Cabinet surface Monthly orquarterly

Check the cabinet surfaceand the cabinet labels.

The cabinet surface isintact. The labels arelegible.

Locks anddoors

Monthly orquarterly

Check whether the lock isnormal and the door can beopened and closed easily.

The locks and the doors ofthe cabinet work properly.

Cleanness ofthe cabinets

Monthly orquarterly

Check whether the cabinetis clean.

The cabinet surface isclean. The interior of thecabinet is dust-free.



16


Cleanness ofthe fan box Yearly

Clean the fan boxaccording to 6 Cleaningthe Fan Box.

The surface of the fan boxis clean. The interior of thefan box is dust-free.

Inside of thecabinet

Monthly orquarterly

Check the LEDs of everycomponent inside thecabinet.

The LEDs work properly.For details on the LEDs,refer to the following part:Front Panel of the High-Power Power DistributionBox, Fan Box (Configuredwith the PFCU Board),LEDs on the Boards.

ESD wrist strap Quarterly

Measure the groundingresistance of the ESD wriststrap as follows:l Use an ESD wrist strap

tester to test the ESDwrist strap.

l Use a multimeter.

l When you use an ESDwrist strap tester, theGOOD LED on it isON.

l When you use amultimeter, thegrounding resistance ofthe ESD wrist strapranges from 0.8megohm to 1.2megohms.

Protection ofthe idle opticalports on boards

Monthly orquarterly

Check the dustproof capson the idle optical ports.

The dustproof caps are onthe idle optical ports.

4.4 Cable Maintenance ItemsThis section describes the cable maintenance items. The maintenance items consist of cablelabels, connectors and sockets, connection of E1/T1 cables, connection of Ethernet cables, andconnection of optical cables.

Table 4-4 describes the cable maintenance items.

Table 4-4 Cable maintenance items


Checkconnectors andsockets

Monthly orquarterly

Check the insulators ofthe connectors or thesockets.

The insulators of theconnectors or the socketsare clean.



17


E1/T1 cableconnections Yearly Check the connections

of the E1/T1 cables.

l The E1/T1 cables areproperly connected.

l The E1/T1 cables areintact.

l The labels on the cablesare legible.

Ethernet cableconnections Yearly Check the connections

of the Ethernet cables.

l The Ethernet cables areproperly connected.

l The Ethernet cables areintact.


Optical cableconnections Yearly Check the connections

of the optical cables.

l The optical cables areproperly connected.

l The optical cables areintact.




18

5 Powering On/Off the BSC6900

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to power on and power off the BSC6900. The following is described:the distribution of the power switches, powering on the BSC6900 cabinet, powering off theBSC6900 cabinet in a normal situation, and powering off the BSC6900 cabinet in case ofemergencies.

5.1 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common Power Distribution BoxThis section describes the mapping between the six routes of power outputs from the powerdistribution box of the BSC6900 cabinet and the components in the BSC6900 cabinet.

5.2 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power PDBThe power distribution box of the MPR/EPR/TCR provides 20 (10 x 2) routes of power outputs.This section describes the mapping between the eight routes of power outputs from the powerdistribution box of the MPR/EPR/TCR and the components in the cabinet.

5.3 Powering On the CabinetThis section describes how to power on the BSC6900 cabinet and how to handle common powerfailures in the components of the cabinet.

5.4 Powering Off the Cabinet in a Normal SituationThis section describes how to power off the BSC6900 cabinet in a normal situation. You mustpower off the BSC6900 cabinet before relocating the equipment or before a forecasted territorialpower blackout. Powering off the BSC6900 cabinet disrupts all the ongoing services. Therefore,power off the BSC6900 cabinet only when required.

5.5 Powering Off the Cabinet in Emergency CasesThis section describes how to power off the BSC6900 cabinet in emergency cases. To ensurethe security of the BSC6900 cabinet, the BSC6900 cabinet must be powered off in emergencycases, such as fire, smoke, or water immersion.

BSC6900 GUSite Maintenance Guide 5 Powering On/Off the BSC6900


19

5.1 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common PowerDistribution Box

This section describes the mapping between the six routes of power outputs from the powerdistribution box of the BSC6900 cabinet and the components in the BSC6900 cabinet.

Distribution of Power Switches on the Power Distribution Box of the MPR(Configured with OMU Board)/EPR/TCR

When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the distribution of power switches on thepower distribution box of the MPR is the same as the distribution of power switches on the powerdistribution box of the EPR/TCR. Figure 5-1 shows the mapping between the six power switcheson the power distribution box and the components in the MPR (configured with OMU board)/EPR/TCR. Table 5-1 presents the mapping between the six power switches and the componentsin the MPR (configured with OMU board)/EPR/TCR.

Figure 5-1 Mapping between the power switches and the components in the MPR (configuredwith OMU board)/EPR/TCR

Table 5-1 Mapping between the power switches and the components in the MPR (configuredwith OMU board)/EPR/TCR

Component Power Switch on the Power Distribution Box

Subrack 2 SW1, SW4

Subrack 1 SW2, SW5



20


Subrack 0 SW3, SW6

Distribution of Power Switches on the Power Distribution Box of the MPR(Configured with GBAM)

Figure 5-2 shows the mapping between the six power switches on the power distribution boxand the components in the MPR that is configured with GBAM. Table 5-2 presents the mappingbetween the six power switches on the power distribution box and the components in the MPRthat is configured with GBAM.

Figure 5-2 Mapping between the power switches and the components in the MPR (configuredwith GBAM)

Table 5-2 Mapping between the power switches and the components in the MPR (configuredwith GBAM)


Subrack 1 SW1, SW4

Subrack 0 SW2, SW5

KVM SW3

LAN switch SW3



21


GBAM SW3, SW6

5.2 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power PDBThe power distribution box of the MPR/EPR/TCR provides 20 (10 x 2) routes of power outputs.This section describes the mapping between the eight routes of power outputs from the powerdistribution box of the MPR/EPR/TCR and the components in the cabinet.

The power distribution box of the MPR/EPR/TCR provides eight routes of power outputs in twogroups (group A and group B), which are controlled by switches A7 to A10 and B7 to B10respectively. Figure 5-3 shows the mapping between the power switches on the powerdistribution box and the components in the MPR/EPR/TCR. Table 5-3 lists the mapping betweenthe power switches and the components.

Figure 5-3 Distribution of power switches on the power distribution box of the MPR/EPR/TCR

Table 5-3 Mapping between the power switches and the components in the MPR/EPR/TCR


Subrack 2 A8, B8

Subrack 1 A9, B9

Subrack 0 A10, B10



22


Independent fan subrack A7, B7

5.3 Powering On the CabinetThis section describes how to power on the BSC6900 cabinet and how to handle common powerfailures in the components of the cabinet.

Prerequisitesl The surface of the input power cables is not damaged. The input power cables are correctly

and securely connected.l The green and yellow PGND cable for the cabinet is properly connected.l The power switches SW1 to SW6 (or A1 to A10 and B1 to B10) on the power distribution

box are set to OFF.

CAUTIONEnsure that the Checking and Setting the Subrack DIP Switch operation is performed before thecabinet is powered on. After the cabinet is powered on, any modification to the setting of a DIPswitch on a subrack does not take effect.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the power switches that control the BSC power supply on the power distribution frame (PDF)to ON.

Step 2 Set the power switches on the power distribution box to ON after the RUN LED on the frontpanel of the power distribution box blinks every alternate 0.25s.

If the cabinet is... Then...

MPR, Set the corresponding power switches on the power distributionbox to ON. Then, go to Step 3.

EPR/TCR, Set the power switches that correspond to the subracksconfigured in the same cabinet to ON. Then, go to Step 4.

Step 3 Set the power switch on the front panel of the GBAM and the power switch on the rear panel ofthe KVM to ON if the GBAM is configured.

Step 4 Check the power supply to the cabinet components, as listed in Table 5-4.



23

Table 5-4 Checklist for the power supply to the cabinet components

Component Normal LED Status

Board The green RUN LED on the board panel first blinks0.125s on and 0.125s off. After the board is loaded, theindicator blinks one second on and one second off.

Fan box The green RUN LED on the panel of the fan box firstblinks 0.25s on and 0.25s off,and then the indicatorblinks one second on and one second off after thesubrack/independent fan subrack is powered on.

Power distribution monitor board The green RUN LED on the board panel first blinks0.25s on and 0.25s off. After the board is loaded, theindicator blinks one second on and one second off.

GBAM The main power LED on the front panel is on.

LAN switch The POWER LED on the front panel is on.

KVM The POWER LED on the keyboard is on.

Step 5 Power on the cabinet and then check the power supply to the components in the cabinet. Clearthe power failures, if any, according to Table 5-5.

Table 5-5 Handling power failures in the components in the cabinet

Failure Type Handling Measures

Power failure in all the internalparts of the cabinet

Check whether the -48 V power cables and the RTN powercables are properly connected.l If the cable connection is wrong, set all the power

switches on the power distribution box to OFF, and thenreconnect the power cables.CAUTION

Set the power switches that control the BSC power supply onthe PDF to OFF before reconnecting the power cables.

l If the cable connection is correct, replace theOvervoltage Protection Board (WOPB). If the failurepersists, replace the power distribution box.

Power failure in all the boardsin a subrack

Use a multimeter to measure the input voltage of the subrackl If the input voltage is between -40 V and -57 V, replace

the subrack.l If the input voltage is not between -40 V and -57 V, check

the connections of the power cables. If the connectionsof the power cables are loose, set the power switch onthe power distribution box corresponding to the subrackto OFF and then reconnect the power cables. Otherwise,replace the power distribution box because the powerswitch on it may be faulty.



24

Failure Type Handling Measures

Power failure in a certain boardin a subrack

Perform the following operations:1. Check whether the board is securely connected. If the

board is not securely connected, reinstall the board.Observe the LEDs on the board panel. For details aboutthe states of the LEDs on the board panel, see LEDs onthe Boards.

2. Remove the board, and check whether there is anydistorted pin, broken pin, or if any pin is missing on theboard socket. Replace the subrack if there is a distortedpin, broken pin, or if a pin is missing.

3. Reinstall the board, and observe the LEDs on the boardpanel. For details about the states of the LEDs on theboard panel, see LEDs on the Boards.

4. If the LEDs indicate that the board does not worknormally, remove the board and install it into a vacantslot that is for a board of the same type. Then, observethe LEDs on the board panel.l If the board works normally, it indicates that the slot

is faulty. In this case, replace the subrack.l If the board does not work normally, it indicates that

the board is faulty. In this case, replace the board.

Power failure in the GBAM Use a multimeter to measure the input voltage of the GBAM.l If the input voltage is between -40 V and -57 V, replace

the power modules of the GBAM.l If the input voltage is not between -40 V and -57 V, check

the connections of the power cables. If the connectionsof the power cables are loose, set the power switch onthe power distribution box corresponding to the GBAMto OFF and then reconnect the power cables. Otherwise,replace the power distribution box because the powerswitch on it may be faulty.

Power failure in any other partin the cabinet

Use a multimeter to measure the input voltage of the faultycomponent.l If the input voltage is between -40 V and -57 V, replace

the component.l If the input voltage is not between -40 V and -57 V, check

the connections of the power cables. If the connectionsof the power cables are loose, set the power switch onthe power distribution box corresponding to thecomponent to OFF and then reconnect the power cables.Otherwise, replace the power distribution box becausethe power switch on it may be faulty.

----End



25

5.4 Powering Off the Cabinet in a Normal SituationThis section describes how to power off the BSC6900 cabinet in a normal situation. You mustpower off the BSC6900 cabinet before relocating the equipment or before a forecasted territorialpower blackout. Powering off the BSC6900 cabinet disrupts all the ongoing services. Therefore,power off the BSC6900 cabinet only when required.

Prerequisitesl The green and yellow PGND cable for the cabinet is properly connected.l The data on the BSC6900 is backed up.

ContextTo minimize the adverse impact on the BSC6900, power off the EPR/TCR before you poweroff the MPR.

Procedurel In the case that the external GBAM is configured

1. Run the SSH(Secure Shell) client, such as PuTTY, on the LMT PC. Enter the IPaddress of the external GBAM and then log in to the GBAM as user root.

2. Run the poweroff command to shut down the external GBAM.3. Set the power switch on the front panel of the external GBAM to OFF.4. Set power switches SW1 to SW6 on the power distribution box of the EPR/TCR to

OFF.5. If multiple EPR/TCRs are configured, repeat Step 4 to power off all the EPRs/TCRs.

CAUTIONIf only a few EPRs/TCRs are powered off, data inconsistency will occur.

6. Turn off the power switch on the rear panel of the KVM.7. Set power switches SW1 to SW6 on the power distribution box of the MPR to OFF.8. Set the power switches that control the BSC6900 power supply on the PDF to OFF.

l In the case that the OMUa/OMUb board is configured1. Set the power switches corresponding to the subracks configured in the EPR. That is,

set the power switches A7 to A10 and B7 to B10 on the power distribution box toOFF in sequence.

2. Flip raise the ejector levers of the OMUa/OMUb board.

NOTE

Repeat this step if two OMUa/OMUb boards are configured. After you flip open the upper andlower ejector levers, the OMUa/OMUb board automatically shuts down the operating systemand hard disks. The OFFLINE LED on the board is on, which indicates that the board is poweredoff.



26

3. After the OFFLINE LED on the OMUa/OMUb board is ON, set the power switchesA7 to A10 and B7 to B10 on the power distribution box to OFF in sequence.

4. Flip the ejector levers of the OMUa/OMUb board inwards until they are in position.5. Set the power switches that control the BSC power supply on the PDF to OFF.

l In the case that the OMUc board is configured1. Set the power switches corresponding to the subracks configured in the EPR. That is,

set the power switches A7 to A10 and B7 to B10 on the power distribution box toOFF in sequence.

2. Press the PWRBTN button on the OMUc board.

NOTE

Repeat this step if two OMUc boards are configured. After you flip open the upper and lowerejector levers, the OMUc board automatically shuts down the operating system and hard disks.The OFFLINE LED on the board is on, which indicates that the board is powered off.

3. After the OFFLINE LED on the OMU board is ON, set the power switches A7 toA10 and B7 to B10 on the power distribution box to OFF in sequence.

4. Flip the ejector levers of the OMUc board inwards until they are in position.5. Set the power switches that control the BSC power supply on the PDF to OFF.

----End

5.5 Powering Off the Cabinet in Emergency CasesThis section describes how to power off the BSC6900 cabinet in emergency cases. To ensurethe security of the BSC6900 cabinet, the BSC6900 cabinet must be powered off in emergencycases, such as fire, smoke, or water immersion.

Procedure

Step 1 Set all the switches on the power distribution box of the BSC6900 cabinet to OFF.

Step 2 If time permits, set the switches that control the power supply to the BSC6900 on the PDF toOFF.

----End



27

6 Cleaning the Fan Box

This chapter describes how to clean a fan box. To ensure stability and reliability of the equipment,the maintenance personnel should clean each fan box (including the fan boxes in the servicesubracks and the fan boxes in the independent fan subrack) regularly, preferably once everyyear.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, clean cotton cloth, ESD soft brush,

vacuum cleaner, and Phillips screwdriver.l A clean backup fan box is ready for use.

Context

CAUTIONl To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.

Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet.If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

l Cleaning the fan box severely affects heat dissipation; therefore, you should replace the fanbox in less than one minute. Otherwise, the boards will be damaged due to high temperature.

Procedure

Step 1 Clean the backup fan box by using a clean cotton cloth, an ESD soft brush, and a vacuum cleaner.

Step 2 Use a Phillips screwdriver to open the front door of the cabinet and loosen the two captive screwson the fan box.

Step 3 Remove the fan box from the cabinet.

BSC6900 GUSite Maintenance Guide 6 Cleaning the Fan Box


28

DANGERWhen replacing the fan box, do not put your hand inside the fan box. Otherwise, the revolvingfan blade will injure your fingers.

Step 4 Install the backup fan box into the cabinet and then fasten the captive screws to secure the fanbox.

Step 5 Clean the removed fan box with a clean cotton cloth, an ESD soft brush, and a vacuum cleaner.After being cleaned, the fan box is reserved as a backup for future use.

Step 6 Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 to replace other fan boxes.

----End

BSC6900 GUSite Maintenance Guide 6 Cleaning the Fan Box


29

7 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to clean and replace an air filter. The air filter protects the boardsand the BSC6900 from dust. If an air filter is damaged, you must replace it with a new one intime.

7.1 Position of the Air FiltersThis section describes the position of the air filters in the BSC6900 cabinet. The air filters areinstalled on the inner side of the front and rear doors and at the bottom of the cabinet.

7.2 Cleaning the Air Filter at the Bottom of the N68E-22 CabinetThis section describes how to clean the air filter at the bottom of the N68E-22 cabinet. Themaintenance personnel should clean the air filter at the bottom of each cabinet regularly,preferably once every quarter.

7.3 Cleaning the Air Filter on the Inner Side of the Cabinet DoorThis describes how to clean the air filter on the inner side of the cabinet door. The maintenancepersonnel should clean the air filter regularly, preferably once every quarter.

7.4 Replacing the Air FiltersThis section describes how to replace a worn-out BSC6900 air filter. It takes about five minutesto replace an air filter.

BSC6900 GUSite Maintenance Guide 7 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filters


30

7.1 Position of the Air FiltersThis section describes the position of the air filters in the BSC6900 cabinet. The air filters areinstalled on the inner side of the front and rear doors and at the bottom of the cabinet.

Figure 7-1 shows the position of the air filters in the single-door N68E-22 cabinet. Figure7-2 shows the position of the air filters in the double-door N68E-22 cabinet.

Figure 7-1 Air filters in the single-door N68E-22 cabinet



31

Figure 7-2 Air filters in the double-door N68E-22 cabinet

NOTE

The air filter at the bottom of the cabinet is white, and fixed on the rack with screws. The other filters areblack, and fixed on the cabinet with binding strips.

7.2 Cleaning the Air Filter at the Bottom of the N68E-22Cabinet

This section describes how to clean the air filter at the bottom of the N68E-22 cabinet. Themaintenance personnel should clean the air filter at the bottom of each cabinet regularly,preferably once every quarter.



32

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and cotton cloth.

Context

CAUTIONTo protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. Ifno ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Procedure

Step 1 Open the front door of the cabinet and then remove the two screws from the air filter with aPhillips screwdriver, as shown in Figure 7-3.

Figure 7-3 Removing the air filter from the bottom of the cabinet

Step 2 Hold the panel of the air filter frame with both hands and lift the frame slightly to raise the panelhigher than the screws fixing the grounding cables at the bottom of the cabinet. Then, pull theframe out of the cabinet slowly and completely.

Step 3 Clean the air filter with the cotton cloth.



33

CAUTIONDo not clean an air filter with water, which has the risk of damaging the air filter.

Step 4 Insert the clean air filter carefully along the guide rails into the cabinet. Do not push it forcibly.

Step 5 After the air filter is in position, fix the two screws on the air filter frame with a Phillipsscrewdriver, as shown in Figure 7-4.

Figure 7-4 Installing the air filter at the bottom of the cabinet

----End

7.3 Cleaning the Air Filter on the Inner Side of the CabinetDoor

This describes how to clean the air filter on the inner side of the cabinet door. The maintenancepersonnel should clean the air filter regularly, preferably once every quarter.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap and cotton cloth that is dry and clean.



34

Context


Procedure

Step 1 Open the door of the cabinet and strip off the black air filter from the inside of the door.

Step 2 Clean the air filter and the inside metal surface of the door with the clean cotton cloth.

CAUTIONDo not clean an air filter with water, which has the risk of damaging the air filter.

Step 3 Stick the clean air filter along the edges of the inside of the door.

CAUTIONThe air filter must be tightly stuck to the binding strips to avoid falling off. If the binding stripsfail to work, replace them with new ones.

----End

7.4 Replacing the Air FiltersThis section describes how to replace a worn-out BSC6900 air filter. It takes about five minutesto replace an air filter.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strip and Phillips screwdriver.l A new air filters for the BSC6900 are ready.



35

Context


Procedure

Step 1 Remove the air filter from the cabinet.

If... Then...

The air filter is installed at the bottom ofthe cabinet,

Loosen the retention screws with the Phillipsscrewdriver and then remove the air filter.

The air filter is installed on the inner sideof the front door the rear door,

Remove the air filter.

Step 2 Install the new air filter.

If... Then...

The air filter needs to be installed at thebottom of the N68E-22 cabinet,

Install the air filter in the original position andfasten the screws with the Phillips screwdriver.

The air filter needs to be installed on theinner side of the front door the rear door,

Stick the black air filter along the edges of theinner side of the door. Place the black air filteralong the edges of the inner side of the door.Ensure that the edges of the air filter are tightlyattached to the black binding strips to prevent itfrom falling off.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureDispose of the replaced air filter properly to prevent environmental pollution.



36

8 Replacing Boards and Modules

About This Chapter

This chapeter describes how to replace boards of the same hardware version and modules in theBSC6900 cabinet, which involves replacing the boards and modules, acknowledging asuccessful replacement, and handling of the faulty boards. Each section provides an estimatedtime for the replacement of the board as a reference.

ContextBased on the board hardware versions before and after the operation, the operation can be dividedinto the following two types:

l Replacing a board with a board of the same hardware version, for example, replacing FG2aboard with FG2a board.

l Replacing a board with a board of a later hardware version, for example, replacing FG2aboard with FG2c board.

For details about how to replace a board with a board of the same hardware version, see thischapeter.

For details about how to replace one board with a board of a later hardware version, contactHuawei engineers.

Capacity expansion design, board type combination are involved in the replacement operation.It is highly recommended that contact the Huawei office engineer to replace a board with a boardof a later hardware version.

8.1 Strategy on Replacing Legacy Components in an Upgrade ScenarioThis section describes the legacy components that can be used by the BSC6900 after an upgrade.It also describes the strategy on how to replace the faulty legacy components.

8.2 Procedure for Replacing a BoardThis section describes the procedure for replacing a BSC6900 board.

8.3 Replacing an AEUa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty AEUa board. The AEUa board is hot-swappable.It takes about eight minutes to replace the board.

8.4 Replacing an AOUa Board

BSC6900 GUSite Maintenance Guide 8 Replacing Boards and Modules


37

This section describes how to replace a faulty AOUa board. The AOUa board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

8.5 Replacing an AOUc BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty AOUc board. The AOUc board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

8.6 Replacing a DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf board.The DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf board is hot-swappable. It takes about two minutesto replace the board.

8.7 Replacing an EIUa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty EIUa board. The EIUa board is hot-swappable. Ittakes about eight minutes to replace an EIUa board.

8.8 Replacing an FG2a BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty FG2a board. The FG2a board is hot swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

8.9 Replacing an FG2c BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty FG2c board. The FG2c board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

8.10 Replacing an FG2d BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty FG2d board. The FG2d board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

8.11 Replacing a GCUa/GCGa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty GCUa/GCGa board. The GCUa/GCGa board ishot-swappable. It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

8.12 Replacing a GOUa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty GOUa board. The GOUa board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

8.13 Replacing a GOUc BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty GOUc board. The GOUc board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

8.14 Replacing a GOUd BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty GOUd board. The GOUd board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

8.15 Replacing an MDMC BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty MDMC board. The MDMC board is hot-swappable. It takes about ten minutes to replace the board.

8.16 Replacing a NIUa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty NIUa board. The NIUa board is hot-swappable.It takes about two minutes to replace the board.

8.17 Replacing an OIUa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty OIUa board. The OIUa board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

8.18 Replacing an OMU BoardThis section describes how to replace an OMU board. A faulty OMU board needs to be replacedto prevent data from being lost when OMU operation and maintenance are interrupted due to



38

disconnection between the OMU and host boards. For details about how to replace an OMUboard for other purposes, also see this section.

8.19 Replacing a PAMU BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty PAMU board. The PAMU board is hot-swappable.It takes about ten minutes to replace the board.

8.20 Replacing a PEUa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty PEUa board. The PEUa board is hot-swappable.It takes about eight minutes to replace a PEUa board.

8.21 Replacing a POUa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty POUa board. The POUa board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

8.22 Replacing a POUc BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty POUc board. The POUc board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

8.23 Replace an SAUa/SAUc BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty SAUa/SAUc board. The SAUa/SAUc board ishot-swappable. It takes about 16 minutes to replace the SAUa/SAUc board.

8.24 Replacing an SCUa/SCUb BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty SCUa/SCUb board. The SCUa/SCUb board ishot-swappable. It takes about four minutes to replace the board.

8.25 Replacing a TNUa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty TNUa board. The TNUa board is hot-swappable.It takes about four minutes to replace the board.

8.26 Replacing a UOIa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty UOIa board. The UOIa board is hot swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

8.27 Replacing a UOIc BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty UOIc board. The UOIc board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

8.28 Replacing an XPUa/SPUa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty XPUa/SPUa board. The XPUa/SPUa board is hot-swappable. It takes about six minutes to replace and load a board.

8.29 Replacing an XPUb/SPUb BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty XPUb/SPUb board. The XPUb/SPUb board ishot-swappable. It takes about six minutes to replace and load a board.

8.30 Replacing a WOPB BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty WOPB board. The WOPB board is hot-swappable.It takes about ten minutes to replace the board.

8.31 Replacing a SubrackThis section describes how to replace a faulty BSC6900 subrack with a new BSC6900 subrack.After 60 minutes from cutting off the power supply of a faulty subrack, a new subrack will startworking properly.

8.32 Replacing the Independent Fan SubrackWhen an independent fan subrack in the BSC6900 is faulty, the independent fan subrack mustbe replaced. It takes about 15 minutes to replace an independent fan subrack.



39

8.33 Replacing the Power Distribution BoxThis section describes how to replace a faulty power distribution box. It takes about 25 minutesto replace a power distribution box.

8.34 Replacing the Fan BoxWhen a fan box in the service subrack or in the independent fan subrack is faulty, the fan boxmust be replaced. You should finish the replacement of the fan box in less than one minute.

8.35 Replacing the Pluggable Optical ModuleThis section describes how to replace a pluggable optical module when the module is faulty.

8.36 Replacing an Optical Splitter/CombinerThis section describes how to replace an optical splitter/combiner. The BSC6900 opticalsplitters/combiners are LC/LC-LC single-mode optical splitter/combiner and LC/LC-LC multi-mode optical splitter/combiner. It takes about five minutes to replace an optical splitter/combiner.

8.37 Replacing the KVMThis section describes how to replace a faulty KVM. It takes about 10 minutes to replace a KVM.

8.38 Replacing the LAN SwitchThis section describes how to replace a faulty LAN switch. It takes about 10 minutes to replacea LAN switch.

8.39 Replacing the GBAMThis section describes how to replace a faulty GBAM. It takes about 40 minutes to replace aGBAM. There are three models of GBAM, namely, IBM X3650T, C5210, and HP CC3310.



40

8.1 Strategy on Replacing Legacy Components in anUpgrade Scenario

This section describes the legacy components that can be used by the BSC6900 after an upgrade.It also describes the strategy on how to replace the faulty legacy components.

Table 8-1 describes the strategy on how to replace the faulty legacy components of theBSC6900.

Table 8-1 Strategy on replacing faulty legacy components of the BSC6900

Legacy Component With Spare Part Without Spare Part

OMUb board Replace the faulty OMUbboard with the spare OMUbboard. For details, see 8.18Replacing an OMU Board.

Replace the faulty OMUbboard with the spare OMUaboard. For details on how toreplace an OMUb board withan OMUa board, see 8.18Replacing an OMU Board.

DPUa board Replace the faulty DPUaboard with the spare DPUaboard. For details, see 8.6Replacing a DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUfBoard.

Replace the faulty DPUaboard with the spare DPUcboard. For details on how toreplace a DPUa board with aDPUc board, see 8.6Replacing a DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUfBoard.

GBAM/LAN switch Replace the faulty GBAM/LAN switch with the spareGBAM/LAN switch. Fordetails, see 8.39 Replacingthe GBAM and 8.38Replacing the LAN Switch.

Replace the faulty GBAMwith the spare OMUa board.For details on how to replacethe GBAM with an OMUaboard, see 8.39 Replacingthe GBAM.

Common power distributionbox

Replace the faulty powerdistribution box with thespare power distribution box.For details, see 8.33Replacing the PowerDistribution Box.

Contact Huawei engineers.

8.2 Procedure for Replacing a BoardThis section describes the procedure for replacing a BSC6900 board.

8.2.1 Removing a BoardThis section describes how to remove a BSC6900 board.



41

PrerequisitesThe tools are ready, including the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfreecotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.

ContextAll the boards in the BSC6900 cabinet, except the OMUa board, are hot-swappable. For otherprinciples of removing a board, see Precautions on Board Operation.

CAUTIONl The OMUa board can be hot-swappable only after the operating system is shut down.l To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.

Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet.If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Procedurel Removing a board (configuring the new ejector levers)

1. Loosen the fastening screws on the board panel counterclockwise. Ensure that thescrews are fully detached from the subrack, as shown in parts A of Figure 8-1



42

Figure 8-1 Removing a board (configuring the new ejector levers)

2. Press and hold the two locking buttons and turn the ejector levers on the board panels,

as shown in part B of Figure 8-1. The board is detached from the backplane, as shownin part C of Figure 8-1.

3. Hold the two ejector levers and pull the board along the guide rails, as shown in partC of Figure 8-1.

CAUTIONPull the board steadily without shaking the board to avoid damaging the pins on thebackplane or the board connector.

4. Pull the board out of the subrack by pulling the upper ejector lever on the front panelwith one hand and holding the bottom of the board by the other.

5. Put the removed board in an ESD case or bag.



43

CAUTIONWhile removing a board, do not touch the PCB or any other devices except for jumpersand DIP switches.

l Removing a board (configuring the old ejector levers)1. Loosen the fastening screws on the board panel counterclockwise. Ensure that the

screws are fully detached from the subrack, as shown in parts A of Figure 8-2.

Figure 8-2 Removing a board (configuring the old ejector levers)

2. Press the self-locking spring on the two ejector levers on the board panel, and at the

same time, turn the two ejector levers outwards, as shown in part B of Figure 8-2.The board is detached from the backplane, as shown in part C of Figure 8-2.

3. Hold the two ejector levers and pull the board along the guide rails, as shown in partC of Figure 8-2.

CAUTIONPull the board steadily without shaking the board to avoid damaging the pins on thebackplane or the board connector.

4. Pull the board out of the subrack by pulling the upper ejector lever on the front panelwith one hand and holding the bottom of the board by the other.

5. Put the removed board in an ESD case or bag.



44

CAUTIONWhile removing a board, do not touch the PCB or any other devices except for jumpersand DIP switches.

----End

8.2.2 Inserting a BoardThis section describes how to insert a BSC6900 board into the subrack.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready, including the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box or

bag.l A new board is ready and the DIP switches are correctly set.

Context

CAUTIONl You are required to wear an ESD Wrist Strap and plug the ESD wrist strap into the ESD

connector of the cabinet before inserting a board.l While inserting a board, do not touch the PCB or any other devices except the jumpers and

DIP switches with your bare hands.

For other principles of installing a BSC6900 board, see Precautions on Board Operation.

Procedurel Inserting a Board (configuring the new ejector levers)

1. Take the new board out of the ESD box. Then, check the pins and the sockets of theboard.If there is any missing or broken pin, any bent ping or socket, contact Huawei engineersfor replacement.

2. Press and hold the two locking buttons and turn the ejector levers on the board panels,as shown in parts A of Figure 8-3. Turn the ejector lever into the position, as shownin part B of Figure 8-3.



45

Figure 8-3 Installing a BSC6900 board (configuring the new ejector levers)

3. Hold the panel with one hand and the lower edge of the board with the other hand,and then push the board into the subrack along the guide rails until the ejector leversare half closed.

CAUTIONPush in the board slowly and steadily to avoid damage to the pins on the backplaneand the metal piece on the board.

4. Lower the ejector levers of the OMU board until they are in position, as shown in partC of Figure 8-3.

5. Secure the screws on the OMU board, as shown in part D of Figure 8-3.

NOTE

You need to push the screws inwards to secure the screws into the holes on the subrack.

l Inserting a Board (configuring the old ejector levers)

1. Take the new board out of the ESD box. Then, check the pins and the sockets of theboard.If there is any missing or broken pin, any bent ping or socket, contact Huawei engineersfor replacement.

2. Press the latch and turn the ejector lever outwards, as shown in parts A of Figure8-4. Turn the ejector lever into the position, as shown in part B of Figure 8-4.



46

Figure 8-4 Installing a BSC6900 board (configuring the old ejector levers)

3. Hold the panel with one hand and the lower edge of the board with the other hand,

and then push the board into the subrack along the guide rails until the ejector leversare half closed.

CAUTIONPush in the board slowly and steadily to avoid damage to the pins on the backplaneand the metal piece on the board.

4. Lower the ejector levers of the OMU board until they are in position, as shown in partC of Figure 8-4.

5. Secure the screws on the OMU board, as shown in part D of or Figure 8-4.

NOTE

You need to push the screws inwards to secure the screws into the holes on the subrack.

----End

8.3 Replacing an AEUa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty AEUa board. The AEUa board is hot-swappable.It takes about eight minutes to replace the board.



47

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box

or bag.l A new AEUa board is ready.l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

CAUTIONl To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD

wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESDconnector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,wear ESD gloves.

l Replacing the standby AEUa has no adverse effect on the system. When no standby AEUais in position, replacing the board disrupts services carried on this board.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected only through the AEUa board, theongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when youreplace the AEUa board.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the AEUa board to be replaced.

If... Then...

Backup type is Backup, Go to Step 2.

Backup type is No backup, Go to Step 3.

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot andin the slot numbered with that value plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 14 does notwork in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 15 does not work in backup mode either.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.

If... Then...

CPU status is Active normal, 1. Run SWP BRD to switch the board over tostandby.

2. Go to Step 3.CAUTION

Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance,at midnight.



48

If... Then...

The parameter is of any other values, Go to Step 3.

Step 3 Check whether the labels on the E1/T1 cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to theAEUa are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improperconnection after the board is replaced.

Step 4 Disconnect the clock cable (if configured). Loosen the captive screws from the E1/T1 cableconnector with a flat-head screwdriver and disconnect the E1/T1 cable.

Step 5 Remove the board to be replaced by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board.

Step 6 Check whether the settings of the DIP Switches on the AEUa Board of the standby board arecorrect.

If... Then...

The settings are correct, Go to Step 7.

The settings are incorrect, 1. Set the DIP switches correctly.2. Go to Step 7.

Step 7 Insert the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinksevery other 0.125s.

Step 8 Connect the E1/T1 cable and clock cable by referring to the labels.

Step 9 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new board.

If... Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal, Go to Step 11.


Step 10 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.

If... Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board arereported,

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to thealarm help information.

2. Go to Step 9.

No alarms caused by the faulty board arereported,

Go to Step 11.

Step 11 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board isconsistent with the board version matching table.



49

If... Then...

The board version is consistent with theboard version matching table,

Go to Step 12.

The board version is inconsistent with theboard version matching table,

1. Ensure that the program files of the board inthe OMU active workspace installation\bin\fam on the OMU are correct. If the programfiles are incorrect, contact Huaweiengineers.

2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.3. Go to Step 9.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 12 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS serviceswith web browsing.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obviousphysical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packinga board, pay attention to the following points:

l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.

NOTEYou may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

8.4 Replacing an AOUa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty AOUa board. The AOUa board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head

screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.

l A new AOUa board is ready.

l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.



50

Context



l Replacing the standby AOUa has no adverse effect on the system. If no standby AOUa is inposition, replacing the board disrupts services carried on this board.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected only through the AOUa board, theongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when youreplace the AOUa board.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the AOUa board to be replaced.

If... Then...



NOTE



If... Then...

CPU status is Normal, 1. Run SWP BRD to switch the board over tostandby.




Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the optical ports on the AOUaboard to be replaced.



51

If... Then...

The optical port is standby, Go to Step 4.

The optical port is active, 1. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch the active portover to standby status. Set MSP Control Command to MS(Manual Switchover from working link to protectionlink).

2. Go to Step 4.

Step 4 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to theAOUa are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improperconnection after the board is replaced.

Step 5 Remove the clock cable.

Step 6 Remove the optical cable and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them withthe dustfree cotton cloth or the fiber cleaner.

Step 7 Remove the board by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.

Step 8 Check whether the settings of the DIP Switches on the AOUa Board of the standby board arecorrect.

If... Then...



Step 9 Insert the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.

The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinksevery other 0.125s.

Step 10 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and reserve them for later use. Then, installthe optical cables by referring to the labels.

Step 11 Install the clock cable (if configured) by referring to the labels.


If... Then...



Step 13 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.



52

If... Then...



2. Go to Step 12.


Go to Step 14.


If... Then...


Go to Step 15.




NOTE



----End

Follow-up Procedure









53

8.5 Replacing an AOUc BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty AOUc board. The AOUc board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.



l A new AOUc board is ready.


Context



l Replacing the standby AOUc has no adverse effect on the system. Replacing the AOUc boardthat works independently, however, disrupts services carried on the board.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected only through the AOUc board, theongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when youreplace the AOUc board.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the AOUc board to be replaced.

If... Then...



NOTE





54

If... Then...

CPU status is Normal, 1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the boardto standby status.


Run this command in low traffic hours, for instance, atmidnight.


Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the optical ports on the AOUcboard to be replaced.

If... Then...


The optical port is active, 1. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch the active portto standby status. Set MSP Control Command to MS(Manual Switchover from working link to protectionlink).

2. Go to Step 4.

Step 4 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to theAOUc are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improperconnection after the board is replaced.


Step 6 Remove the optical cable and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them withdustfree cotton cloth or fiber cleaner.




Step 9 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and keep them for later use. Then, installthe optical cables by referring to the labels.


Step 11 If the RUN LED blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status ofthe new board.

If... Then...




55

If... Then...



If... Then...



2. Go to Step 11.


Go to Step 13.


If... Then...


Go to Step 14.



2. Run the RST BRD command to reset theboard.

3. Go to Step 11.

NOTE



----End

Follow-up ProcedureRecord the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obviousphysical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packinga board, pay attention to the following points:l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.



56




8.6 Replacing a DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUfBoard

This section describes how to replace a faulty DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf board.The DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf board is hot-swappable. It takes about two minutesto replace the board.


or bag.

l A new DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf board is ready.


Context



l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To usea board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version ato replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

CAUTIONReplacing the DPUa/DPUc/DPUd/DPUf board disrupts all the services carried on the board. Inthe process of replacing the DPUb/DPUe board, logically inhibiting the board does not disruptthe services carried on the dedicated channels. Removing the board, however, disrupts all theservices carried on the board.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the inhibited status of the board.



57

If... Then...

Logical inhibited board or Physicalinhibited board includes the DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf boardto be replaced.

Go to Step 2.

Logical inhibited board or Physicalinhibited board does not include theDPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUfboard to be replaced.

1. Run the INH BRD command to physicallyinhibit the board.

2. Go to Step 2.NOTE

Physically inhibiting the DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf board prevents new accesses from theboard and reduces the impact of replacing the boardon the BSC6900 operation.

Step 2 Remove the DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf board to be replaced by referring to 8.2.1Removing a Board.


Step 4 Run the UIN BRD command to unblock the new board.The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinksevery alternate 0.125s.

Step 5 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the new board.

If... Then...

CPU status is Normal, Go to Step 7.

CPU status is not Normal, Go to Step 6.


If... Then...


1. Identify and rectify the fault according to thealarm information.

2. Go to Step 5.


Go to Step 7.




58

If... Then...


Go to Step 8.




3. Go to Step 5.

NOTE


Step 8 Test the CS services by dialing and the PS services by browsing web pages to ensure that thenew board is functional.

----End

Follow-up Procedure







8.7 Replacing an EIUa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty EIUa board. The EIUa board is hot-swappable. Ittakes about eight minutes to replace an EIUa board.


screwdriver, and ESD box or bag.

l A new EIUa board is ready.




59

Context




CAUTIONl Replacing the standby EIUa has no adverse impact on the system. Replacing the EIUa board

that works independently, however, disrupts services carried on this board.l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the EIUa board, the

ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when youreplace the EIUa board.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the EIUa board to be replaced.

If... Then...



NOTE





60

If... Then...

CPU status is Active normal, 1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the boardover to standby status.




Step 3 Check whether the labels on the E1/T1 cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to theEIUa are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improperconnection after the board is replaced.

Step 4 Disconnect the clock cable. Loosen the captive screws from the E1/T1 cable connector with aflat-head screwdriver and disconnect the E1/T1 cable.


Step 6 Check whether the settings of the DIP Switches on the EIUa Board of the standby board arecorrect.

If... Then...



Step 7 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinksevery other 0.125s.

Step 8 Install the cables for the board.

If... Then...

The E1/T1 cables are connected to theboard,

Insert the E1/T1 connector into the socket onthe board, and use a Phillips screwdriver totighten the screws on the E1/T1 connector.

The 75-ohm clock cables are connected tothe board,

Insert the clock cables.




61

If... Then...




If... Then...



2. Go to Step 9.


Go to Step 11.


If... Then...


Go to Step 12.




NOTE



----End

Follow-up ProcedureRecord the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obviousphysical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packinga board, pay attention to the following points:l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.



62

l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


8.8 Replacing an FG2a BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty FG2a board. The FG2a board is hot swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.


screwdriver, and ESD box or bag.l A new FG2a board is ready.l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context




CAUTIONl If the FG2a board is standby and the data over the port on the FG2a board are backed up,

replacing the standby FG2a board has no adverse effect on the system.l When the FG2a boards work in board backup mode and the ports work in load sharing mode,

replacing the standby FG2a board disrupts part of services if the traffic over the ports exceedsthe bandwidth of the ports on the active board. When the FG2a boards work in board backupmode with independent ports, replacing the standby FG2a board disrupts all the servicescarried on the standby board.

l Replacing an FG2a board that works independently disrupts all the services on the board.l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the FG2a board, the

ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when youreplace the FG2a board.



63

Procedure

Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the FG2a board to be replaced.

If... Then...



NOTE


Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the FG2a board to be replaced.

If... Then...





Step 3 Run the DSP ETHPORT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the FG2aboard to be replaced.

If... Then...

The ports are configured in independentmode,

Go to Step 4.

The ports are configured in active/standbymode, and the ports are active,

1. Run the SWP ETHPORT command toswitch the active port to standby status.

2. Go to Step 5.

The ports are configured in active/standbymode, and the ports are standby,

Go to Step 5.

Step 4 Run the DSP IPPATH command to query the IP Path status carried on the board to be replacing.The blocked IP path cannot carry new services while the existing services are not affected.



64

If... Then...

IPPATH status is AVAILABLE 1. Run the BLK IPPATH command to block the IPpath.

2. Go to Step 5.

IPPATH status is UNAVAILABLE Go to Step 5.

Step 5 Check whether the labels on the Ethernet cable connected to the FG2a board are legible. If thelabels are illegible, attach a new label to the Ethernet cable to avoid improper connection afterreplacing the board.

Step 6 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the replaced board.


Step 8 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.


Step 9 Install the Ethernet cables by referring to the labels.


If... Then...




If... Then...



2. Go to Step 10.


Go to Step 12.


If... Then...


Go to Step 13.



65

If... Then...




NOTE


Step 13 If the IP path is blocked in Step 4, run the UBL IPPATH command to unblock the IP Path.Otherwise, go to Step 14 directly.


----End

Follow-up Procedure







8.9 Replacing an FG2c BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty FG2c board. The FG2c board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.



l A new FG2c board is ready.




66

Context




CAUTIONl If the FG2c board is standby and the ports on the FG2c board are backed up, replacing the

standby FG2c board has no adverse effect on the system.

l When the FG2c boards work in backup mode and the ports work in load sharing mode,replacing the standby FG2c board disrupts part of services if the total traffic over the portsexceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active board. When the FG2c boards work inbackup mode with independent ports, replacing the standby FG2c board disrupts all theservices carried on the standby board.

l Replacing an FG2c board that works independently disrupts all the services on the board.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the FG2c board, theongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when youreplace the FG2c board.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the FG2c board to be replaced.

If... Then...



NOTE


Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the FG2c board to be replaced.



67

If... Then...

CPU status is Active normal, 1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the boardto standby status.




Step 3 Run the DSP ETHPORT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the FG2cboard to be replaced.

If... Then...


Go to Step 4.



2. Go to Step 5.


Go to Step 5.


If... Then...


2. Go to Step 5.


Step 5 Check whether the labels on the Ethernet cable connected to the FG2c board are legible. If thelabels are illegible, attach a new label to the Ethernet cable to avoid improper connection afterreplacing the board.







68


If... Then...




If... Then...



2. Go to Step 10.


Go to Step 12.


If... Then...


Go to Step 13.




3. Go to Step 10.

NOTE




----End



69

Follow-up ProcedureRecord the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obviousphysical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packinga board, pay attention to the following points:l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


8.10 Replacing an FG2d BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty FG2d board. The FG2d board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.


screwdriver, and ESD box or bag.l A new FG2d board is ready.l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context






70

CAUTIONl If the FG2d board is standby and the ports on the FG2d board are backed up, replacing the

standby FG2d board has no adverse effect on the system.

l When the FG2d boards work in backup mode and the ports work in load sharing mode,replacing the standby FG2d board disrupts part of services if the total traffic over the portsexceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active board. When the FG2d boards work inbackup mode with independent ports, replacing the standby FG2d board disrupts all theservices carried on the standby board.

l Replacing an FG2d board that works independently disrupts all the services on the board.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the FG2d board, theongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when youreplace the FG2d board.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the FG2d board to be replaced.

If... Then...



NOTE


Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the FG2d board to be replaced.

If... Then...





Step 3 Run the DSP ETHPORT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the FG2dboard to be replaced.



71

If... Then...


Go to Step 4.



2. Go to Step 5.


Go to Step 5.


If... Then...


2. Go to Step 5.


Step 5 Check whether the labels on the Ethernet cable connected to the FG2d board are legible. If thelabels are illegible, attach a new label to the Ethernet cable to avoid improper connection afterreplacing the board.






If... Then...






72

If... Then...



2. Go to Step 10.


Go to Step 12.


If... Then...


Go to Step 13.




3. Go to Step 10.

NOTE




----End





73

8.11 Replacing a GCUa/GCGa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty GCUa/GCGa board. The GCUa/GCGa board ishot-swappable. It takes about five minutes to replace the board.



l A new GCUa/GCGa board is ready.


Context




CAUTIONReplacing the standby GCUa/GCGa board has no adverse impact on the services in the system.Replacing the GCUa/GCGa board that works independently, however, disrupts services carriedin the BSC6900.

Procedure

Step 1 Display the MPS in the Device Panel on the LMT. Check the configuration of the GCUa/GCGaboard.

If... Then...

Slots 12 and 13 are configured with the GCUa/GCGa boards, Go to Step 2.

Slot 12 or 13 is configured with the GCUa/GCGa board, Go to Step 3.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board.



74

If... Then...





Step 3 Check whether the labels on the cables connected to the GCUa/GCGa board are legible. If thelabels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper connection after the boardis replaced.

Step 4 Disconnect the cables from the faulty board.

Step 5 Remove the GCUa/GCGa board to be replaced by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board.



Step 7 Install the cables by referring to the labels.


If... Then...

If the CPU status of only one GCUa/GCGa board is Active normal, Go to Step 10.

If the CPU status of two GCUa/GCGa boards is Standby normal, Go to Step 10.



If... Then...



2. Go to Step 8.


Go to Step 10.




75

If... Then...


Go to Step 11.




NOTE


Step 11 Run the DSP CLK command to query the clock status of the SCUa board in the MPS.

If... Then...

If the clock status of the SCUa board is Normal, The replacement is complete.

If the clock status of the SCUa board is Abnormal, Go to Step 8.

----End

Follow-up Procedure







8.12 Replacing a GOUa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty GOUa board. The GOUa board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.



76



l A new GOUa board is ready.


Context




CAUTIONl If the GOUa board is standby and the data over the port on the GOUa board are backed up,

replacing the standby GOUa board has no adverse effect on the system.

l When the GOUa boards work in board backup mode and the ports work in load sharing mode,replacing the standby GOUa board disrupts part of services if the total traffic over the portsexceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active board. When the GOUa boards work inboard backup mode with independent ports, replacing the standby GOUa board disrupts allthe services carried on the standby board.

l Replacing a GOUa board that works independently disrupts the services on that board.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the GOUa board, theongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when youreplace the GOUa board.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the GOUa board to be replaced.

If... Then...





77

NOTE


Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the GOUa board to be replaced.

If... Then...





Step 3 Run the DSP ETHPORT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the GOUaboard to be replaced.

If... Then...


Go to Step 4.



2. Go to Step 5.


Go to Step 5.


If... Then...


2. Go to Step 5.


Step 5 Check whether the labels on the optical cable connected to the GOUa are legible. If the labelsare illegible, attach a new label to the cable to avoid improper connection after the board isreplaced.

Step 6 Remove the optical cables and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them withthe dustfree cotton cloth or the fiber cleaner.



78





If... Then...


The CPU is in another status, Go to Step 11.


If... Then...



2. Go to Step 10.


Go to Step 12.


If... Then...


Go to Step 13.




NOTE





79


----End



8.13 Replacing a GOUc BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty GOUc board. The GOUc board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.


screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.l A new GOUc board is ready.l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context






80

CAUTIONl If the GOUc board is standby and the ports on the GOUc board are backed up, replacing the

standby GOUc board has no adverse effect on the system.

l When the GOUc boards work in backup mode and the ports work in load sharing mode,replacing the standby GOUc board disrupts part of services if the total traffic over the portsexceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active board. When the GOUc boards work inbackup mode with independent ports, replacing the standby GOUc board disrupts all theservices carried on the standby board.

l Replacing a GOUc board that works independently disrupts the services on the board.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the GOUc board, theongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when youreplace the GOUc board.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the GOUc board to be replaced.

If... Then...



NOTE


Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the GOUc board to be replaced.

If... Then...





Step 3 Run the DSP ETHPORT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the GOUcboard to be replaced.



81

If... Then...


Go to Step 4.



2. Go to Step 5.


Go to Step 5.


If... Then...


2. Go to Step 5.


Step 5 Check whether the labels on the optical cables connected to the GOUc board are legible. If thelabels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper connection after the boardis replaced.

Step 6 Remove the optical cables and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them withdustfree cotton cloth or fiber cleaner.






If... Then...






82

If... Then...



2. Go to Step 10.


Go to Step 12.


If... Then...


Go to Step 13.




3. Go to Step 10.

NOTE




----End





83

8.14 Replacing a GOUd BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty GOUd board. The GOUd board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.



l A new GOUd board is ready.


Context




CAUTIONl If the GOUd board is standby and the ports on the GOUd board are backed up, replacing the

standby GOUd board has no adverse effect on the system.

l When the GOUd boards work in backup mode and the ports work in load sharing mode,replacing the standby GOUd board disrupts part of services if the total traffic over the portsexceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active board. When the GOUd boards work inbackup mode with independent ports, replacing the standby GOUd board disrupts all theservices carried on the standby board.

l Replacing a GOUd board that works independently disrupts the services on the board.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the GOUd board, theongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when youreplace the GOUd board.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the GOUd board to bereplaced.



84

If... Then...



NOTE


Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the GOUd board to be replaced.

If... Then...





Step 3 Run the DSP ETHPORT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the GOUdboard to be replaced.

If... Then...


Go to Step 4.



2. Go to Step 5.


Go to Step 5.


If... Then...


2. Go to Step 5.



85

If... Then...


Step 5 Check whether the labels on the optical cables connected to the GOUd board are legible. If thelabels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper connection after the boardis replaced.







If... Then...




If... Then...



2. Go to Step 10.


Go to Step 12.


If... Then...


Go to Step 14.



86

If... Then...




3. Go to Step 10.

NOTE




----End

Follow-up Procedure







8.15 Replacing an MDMC BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty MDMC board. The MDMC board is hot-swappable. It takes about ten minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box or

bag.

l A new MDMC board is ready for use.

l The LMT is started, and the connection between the LMT PC and the server is normal.



87

Context

CAUTIONl You are required to Wear an ESD Wrist Strap and plug the ESD wrist strap into the ESD

connector of the cabinet before replacing the board. If the ESD wrist strap is unavailable orif there is no ESD connector for the ESD wrist strap, wear ESD gloves.

l During the replacement of the MDMC board, the power distribution monitor function isunavailable.

Procedure

Step 1 Record the state of the mute switch on the front panel of the power distribution box.For the position of the mute switch, see Panel of the MDMC Board.

Step 2 Set all the bits of DIP switch S2 on the new MDMC board to ON, as shown in Figure 8-5.

Figure 8-5 Settings of DIP switch S2 on the MDMC board

Step 3 Remove the captive screw on the MDMC board with a Phillips screwdriver.

Step 4 Hold the handle of the MDMC board and remove the board from the power distribution box.Then, put the MDMC board into an ESD box or bag.

CAUTIONThe MDMC board is twice as long as other boards. To avoid damaging the MDMC board duringthe replacement, move the board only after you have completely removed the board from thecabinet.

Step 5 Insert the new MDMC board into the power distribution box along the guide rails.

Step 6 Secure the captive screw on the MDMC board.

Step 7 Set the mute switch on the new MDMC board according to the recorded settings.

Step 8 When the RUN LED blinks every alternate 0.25s, it indicates that the new board is automaticallyloading the data configuration file.

For details about the state of the LEDs on the board, see DIP Switch on the MDMC Board.



88

NOTE

When the RUN LED blinks every alternate 0.25s or the ALM LED is on, you must remove the MDMCboard and install the board again to ensure that the MDMC board is fully in contact with the backplane.

Step 9 When the RUN LED blinks every alternate second, it indicates that the board works properly.

Step 10 On the LMT, choose Alarm > Browse Alarm to check whether a board failure alarm is reported.

If such an alarm is reported, identify and rectify the fault according to the alarm information.

----End



8.16 Replacing a NIUa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty NIUa board. The NIUa board is hot-swappable.It takes about two minutes to replace the board.


or bag.l A new NIUa board is ready.l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context






89

Procedure

Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the inhibited status of the board.

If... Then...

The query result of Logical INH Status orPhysical INH Status includes the NIUaboard to be replaced.

Go to Step 2.

The query result of Logical INH Statusand Physical INH Status does not includethe NIUa board to be replaced.

1. Run the INH BRD command to physicallyinhibit the board.

2. Go to Step 2.

Step 2 Remove the NIUa board to be replaced by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board.


Step 4 Run the UIN BRD command to unblock the new board.

The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinksevery alternate 0.125s.

Step 5 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the new board.

If... Then...

CPU status is Normal, Go to Step 7.

CPU status is not Normal, Go to Step 6.


If... Then...


1. Identify and rectify the fault according to thealarm information.

2. Go to Step 5.


Go to Step 7.


If... Then...


Go to Step 8.



90

If... Then...




3. Go to Step 5.

NOTE


Step 8 Test the CS services by dialing and the PS services by browsing web pages to ensure that thenew board is functional.

----End



8.17 Replacing an OIUa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty OIUa board. The OIUa board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.


screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.l A new OIUa board is ready.l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.



91

Context




CAUTIONl Replacing the standby OIUa board has no adverse impact on the system. When no standby

OIUa board is in position, replacing the board disrupts services carried on this board.l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the OIUa board, the

ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when youreplace the OIUa board.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the OIUa board to be replaced.

If... Then...



NOTE





92

If... Then...

CPU status is Normal, 1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the boardover to standby status.




Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the optical ports on the OIUaboard to be replaced.

If... Then...


The optical port is active, 1. Run the DSP MSP command to query the MSP status.l If the MSP is not started, run the ACT MSP command

to activate the MSP.l If the MSP has been started, go to 3.2.

2. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch the active portto standby status.l If the active port is located in a slot with a even number,

set MSPCMD to MS(Manual switchover fromworking link to protection link).

l If the active port is located in a slot with an odd number,setMSPCMD to LOP(Lockout of Protection).


Before activating the MSP, ensure that the local end and the peer endhave the same protection mode.

Step 4 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to theOIUa are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improperconnection after the board is replaced.







93




If... Then...




If... Then...



2. Go to Step 11.


Go to Step 13.


If... Then...


Go to Step 15.




NOTE


Step 14 If the status of the active port has been changed to standby in Step 3, run the SET MSPCMDcommand withMSP Control Command set to CLEAR(Cleared). If the status of the activeport is not changed, go to Step 15.



94


----End



8.18 Replacing an OMU BoardThis section describes how to replace an OMU board. A faulty OMU board needs to be replacedto prevent data from being lost when OMU operation and maintenance are interrupted due todisconnection between the OMU and host boards. For details about how to replace an OMUboard for other purposes, also see this section.

Prerequisitesl The tools required for replacing an OMU board are prepared: an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips

screwdriver, a flat-head screwdriver, a wrench, and an ESD box or bag.l A new OMU board is prepared.l The following installation information about the OMU board to be replaced is obtained:

– FTP server password– Administrator password– Operating system (OS) type of the OMU board– Information about all IP addresses of the OMU board, including external fixed IP

address (external gateway IP address), external virtual IP address, internal fixed IPaddress, internal virtual IP address, backup channel IP address of the active and standbyOMUs, and debugging IP address.

l The version software required for installing the new OMU board is obtained. ADopra_Linux_U tool, Suse Linux OS installation disk, or Windows 2003 OS installationdisk is prepared for a new OMU board whose OS is Dopra Linux, Suse Linux, and Windows2003 respectively.



95

NOTE

Contact Huawei engineers who can obtain the installation package and tool by performing thefollowing operation:

l Log in to http://support.huawei.com/support/ and choose Software Center > VersionSoftware > Wireless Product Line > SingleRAN > MBSC > BSC6900 > BSC6900 ProductVersion > BSC6900 Software Version.

l Click Software Version VER to obtain the BSC6900 version installation package.

l Log in to http://support.huawei.com/support/ and choose Software Center > VersionSoftware > Wireless Product Line > SingleRAN > SRAN O&M tools to obtain theDopra_Linux_USB Disks.

ContextFigure 8-6 shows the procedure for replacing an OMU board.

Figure 8-6 Procedure for replacing an OMU board

8.18.1 Checking OMU Status Before Replacing an OMU BoardThis section describes how to check OMU status before replacing an OMU board. To ensureOMU data consistency before and after a replacement, users need to check the status of the OMUboard to be replaced before a replacement. Users need to query and record the OMU boardinformation, active or standby state, and data synchronization status.



96

Prerequisitesl The OMU board to be replaced is not faulty and can perform operation and maintenance

functions.

ContextIf the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot perform operation and maintenancefunctions, skip the task in this section. Obtain the latest OMU system backup data and replacethe OMU board by referring to 8.18.2 Scenario: Replacing an OMU Board in Single-OMUMode, 8.18.3 Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU in Dual-System Mode, or 8.18.5Scenario: Replacing Active and Standby OMUs in Dual-System Mode.

Procedure

Step 1 Check and record the OMU routing function status of the OMU board to be replaced.1. Log in to the OMU.2. Enter the cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam command and press Enter to go to the

directory where the ip_forward.sh script is saved.3. Enter the chmod +x root_login.sh command and press Enter to make the

ip_forward.sh script executable.4. Enter the ./ip_forward.sh status command and press Enter to query the status of OMU

route forwarding.

NOTE

Parameter description

l Configuration status indicates the status of OMU route forwarding to be configured.

l Actual status indicates the current status of OMU route forwarding.

l enabled indicates that OMU route forwarding is enabled. disabled indicates that OMU routeforwarding is disabled.

Step 2 Optional: When log in as the user root, skip this step. When the OMU board is an OMUc board,users need to check and record the Forbid User Root to Log In status of the OMU board to bereplaced.1. Log in as a common or lgnusr user. For details, see Logging In to the OMU in the BSC6900

GU OMU Administration Guide.2. Enter the command su and press Enter3. Enter the root user password and press Enter to switch the user account from common user

or lgnusr user to root user.4. Enter the cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam command and press Enter to switch the

current directory to the directory where the root_login.sh script is saved.5. Enter the chmod +x root_login.sh command and press Enter to make the root_login.sh

script executable.6. Enter the ./root_login.sh status command and press Enter to query the status of the root

user login with SSH.



97

NOTE

Parameter description:

l Configuration status specifies the status that the user root needs to be set to.

l Actual status means the status of the user root.

l enabled means that the user root is allowed to log in to the OMU. disabled means that the user root isforbidden to log in to the OMU.

l If the returned result is The script does not support this system!, the operating system of the OMUc boarddoes not support the Forbid User Root function.

Step 3 Log in to the LMT by referring to Log in to the LMT.

Step 4 Check consistency in the configuration data, version software, and license.

1. Run the MML command ACT CRC to check whether the configuration data of allBSC6900 host boards and the OMU board is consistent.Expected result: The returned result shows that the data is consistent.

2. Run the MML command CMP BRDVER to check whether the running versions of allBSC6900 host boards and the OMU board are consistent.Expected result: The returned result shows that the versions are consistent.

3. Run the MML command CMP LICENSE to check whether the licenses of all BSC6900host boards and the OMU board are consistent.Expected result: The returned result shows that the licenses are consistent.

NOTE

l If the configuration data is inconsistent, resolve it by referring to the handling suggestions in ALM-20736Data Inconsistency Between OMU and Host.

l If the software versions are inconsistent, resolve it by referring to ALM-20733 Software VersionInconsistency Between OMU and Host.

l If the licenses are inconsistent, resolve it by referring to ALM-20734 License Inconsistency Between OMUand Host.

Step 5 Run the MML command LST VER. Query and record the value of OS type.

Step 6 Run the MML command LST TZ. Query and record the time zone and daylight savingtime.

Step 7 Run the MML command LST MBSCMODE. Query and record the OMU mode.

Step 8 Query and record the external gateway IP address of the OMU board to be replaced.

Option Description

If the OMU OS is Dopra Linux or SuseLinux

1. Log in to the OMU by referring to Logging Into the OMU.

2. Enter the command route and press Enter.Query and record the value of Gateway whoseDestination is set to default.



98

Option Description

If the OMU OS is Windows 1. Log in to the OMU by referring to Logging Into the OMU.

2. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and pressEnter to enter the OMU command mode.

3. Enter the command ipconfig and press Enter.Query and record the value of DefaultGateway corresponding to External NetworkTeam.

Step 9 Query the information about the OMU board to be replaced.l When the board is OMUa/OMUb board, run the MML command DSP OMU, and record the

information in Table 8-2.

Table 8-2 OMU board status information table

Item Setting information example

Computer name OMU_21

Internal network fixed IP 80.168.3.50

External network fixed IP 10.168.172.2

Backup network IP 192.168.3.50

Operational state Active normal

Version XXXXXX

External network virtual IP 10.168.192.5

External network virtual IP mask 255.255.254.0

Internal network virtual IP 80.168.3.40

Internal network virtual IP mask 255.0.0.0

Data-sync state Normal

l When the board is OMUc board, run the DSP OMU and record in Table 8-3. The Backupnetwork IP is based on the following:– Run the ifconfig bond3 command to query the backup network IP of B_UPDATE0.– Run the ifconfig bond4 command to query the backup network IP of B_UPDATE1.

Table 8-3 OMU board status information table


Computer name OMU_21

Internal network fixed IP 80.168.3.50



99


External network fixed IP 10.168.172.2

Backup network IP of B_UPDATE0 192.168.9.50

Backup network IP of B_UPDATE1 192.168.3.50

Operational state Active normal

Version XXXXXX

External network virtual IP 10.168.192.5

External network virtual IP mask 255.255.254.0

Internal network virtual IP 80.168.3.40

Internal network virtual IP mask 255.0.0.0

Data-sync state Normal

NOTE

l If only one OMU board is configured, Data-sync state is not included in the queried information.

l Query and record the debugging IP address of the OMU board to be replaced.

l If the OMU operating system is Dopra Linux, log in to the OMU and execute ifconfig bond2 to querythe debugging IP address.

l If the OMU operating system is Suse Linux, log in to the OMU and execute ifconfig eth2 to query thedebugging IP address.

l If the OMU operating system is Windows, log in to the OMU and query the debugging IP addressconfigured in Eth2 properties of Network Connections.

If... Then...

The MPS is configured with two OMUboards

Perform operations described in Step 10.

The MPS is configured with one OMUboard

Perform operations described in 8.18.2Scenario: Replacing an OMU Board inSingle-OMU Mode.

Step 10 Run the MML command LST GVNPLOCALIP to query the BSC local IP address, VLAN IDsfor communication between the OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs for communication betweenthe OMU and EMS/LMT, VLAN IDs for communication between the OMU and VNP. Then,record the results.

Step 11 Run the MML command DSP OMUMODULE to query the status of the OMU processes.



100

If... Then...

State is Active or Stopped Perform operations described in Step 12.

State is Abnormal Contact Huawei technical support.

Step 12 Check whether the OMU board to be replaced is active or on standby.

If... Then...

The board is in Standby normal state Perform operations described in 8.18.3Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU inDual-System Mode.

The board is in Active normal state Perform operations described in Step 13.

Step 13 Based on Data-sync state queried in Step 9, do as follows:

If... Then...

Data-sync state is not Datasynchronization is successful

Clear alarms by referring to ALM-20701OMU Failure Switchover and ALM-20704OMU Data Synchronization Failure. Go toStep 14 after the alarms are cleared.

Data-sync state is Data synchronizationis successful


Step 14 Run the MML command SWP OMU to manually switch over the active and standby OMUboards. Wait 5 minutes, and run the DSP OMU command to check that the OMU board to bereplaced is in the standby state and Data-sync state is set to Data synchronization issuccessful. Replace the OMU board by referring to 8.18.3 Scenario: Replacing the StandbyOMU in Dual-System Mode.

----End

8.18.2 Scenario: Replacing an OMU Board in Single-OMU ModeThis section describes how to replace an OMU board when only one OMU is configured onBSC6900. In this scenario, OMU operation and maintenance of the host boards are interrupted.

Contextl Replacing an OMU board in single-OMU mode will disconnect the OMU board from the

host boards and interrupt OMU operation and maintenance. System running data duringthis period of time will be lost.

Replacing an OMU board in single-OMU mode occurs in one the following scenarios:



101

Scenario: Old and New OMU Boards Running the Same OSThis section describes how to replace an OMU board of a BSC6900 configured with only oneOMU board when the OMU board to be replaced and the new OMU board run the same operatingsystem (OS).

Prerequisitesl You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging

Out of the LMT.l A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.

NOTE

The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.

ContextIf the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance, skipprocedures for backing up and saving the data and obtain the latest backup data for restoring thedata. The following procedures take a functional OMU board as an example.

CAUTIONl To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap

and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. Fordetailed operations, see Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground pointis unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedurel Back up OMU system data to an OMU hard disk.

1. Run the MML command BKP DB to back up system files to the specified path. Inthis step, set Path of Backup File and File Name to appropriate values.

l Save the performance configuration files, SSL certificate files, license files, and OMUsystem data to the LMT PC.1. Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, seeFile Manager.2. Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click

Download.

NOTE

Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming thatthe OMU active workspace is version_a:

l Performance configuration files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas.Only DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.

l SSL certificate files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.

l License files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\license.

3. Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert a new one. For detailed operations,see Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers orReplacing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers.



102

l Optional: Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers1. Unscrew the captive screws on the OMU board counterclockwise, as shown in part A

of Figure 8-7.

Figure 8-7 Removing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers

NOTE

The preceding figure takes an OMUa/OMUb board as an example. The procedure for an OMUcboard is similar.

2. Optional: If the board is an OMUc board, gently press the PWRBTN button.3. Press and hold the two locking buttons, flip outward the ejector levers on the OMU

board panel to unlock them, as shown in part B of Figure 8-7.4. Remove the Ethernet cable, mouse cable, keyboard cable, and monitor cable (if

configured) from the OMU board after the OFFLINE LED flashes fast and then issteady blue.

5. Fully rotate the ejector levers outwards of the OMU board to separate it from thebackplane. Remove the OMU board along the guide rails, as shown in part C of Figure8-7.



103

6. Press and hold the two locking buttons of the new board, flip outward the ejector leversto separate them from the self-locking latch, and rotate them until they cannot berotated, as shown in part A of Figure 8-8.

7. Slide the new board along the guide rails into the subrack, as shown in part B of Figure8-8.

Figure 8-8 Installing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers

NOTE

l The preceding figure takes an OMUa/OMUb board as an example. The procedure for anOMUc board is similar.

l The OMUa/OMUb board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 inthe MPS at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 20 to 23 are recommended.

l The OMUc boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in theMPS at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 24 to 25 are recommended.

8. Flip inward the ejector levers of the OMU board until they are in position, as shownin part C of Figure 8-8.

9. Secure the screws on the OMU board, as shown in part D of Figure 8-8.The new board automatically loads software and configuration data, and the RUNLED blinks 0.125 second on and 0.125 second off.

10. Connect the cables by referring to the labels.



104

l Optional: Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers

1. Unscrew the captive screws on the OMU board counterclockwise, as shown in part Aof Figure 8-9.

Figure 8-9 Removing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers

NOTE

The preceding figure takes an OMUa/OMUb board as an example. The procedure for an OMUcboard is similar.

2. Optional: If the board is an OMUc board, gently press the PWRBTN button.

3. Flip outward the ejector levers of the OMU board, as shown in part B of Figure 8-9.

4. Remove the Ethernet cable, mouse cable, keyboard cable, and monitor cable (ifconfigured) from the OMU board after the OFFLINE LED flashes fast and then issteady blue.

5. Fully rotate the ejector levers outwards of the OMU board to separate it from thebackplane. Remove the OMU board along the guide rails, as shown in part C of Figure8-9.



105

6. Flip outward the ejector levers of the new OMU board, as shown in part A of Figure8-10.

7. Slide the new board along the guide rails into the subrack, as shown in part B of Figure8-10.

Figure 8-10 Installing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers

NOTE

l The preceding figure takes an OMUa/OMUb board as an example. The procedure for anOMUc board is similar.

l The OMUa/OMUb board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 inthe MPS at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 20 to 23 are recommended.

l The OMUc boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in theMPS at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 24 to 25 are recommended.

8. Flip inward the ejector levers of the OMU board until they are in position, as shownin part C of Figure 8-10.

9. Secure the screws on the OMU board, as shown in part D of Figure 8-10.

The new board automatically loads software and configuration data, and the RUNLED blinks 0.125 second on and 0.125 second off.

10. Connect the cables by referring to the labels.



106

l Install OMU applications and change IP addresses of the new OMU.1. Install OMU applications as instructed in Table 8-4.

Table 8-4 Criteria for operations (1)

If... Then...

The OMU OS isDopra Linux or SuseLinux

1. Optional: Uninstall the OMU applications on the newOMU board.NOTE

If the new OMU board is installed with the OMU applications,perform this step to uninstall the OMU applications of anearlier version.

If the new OMU board is not installed with the OMUapplicaitons, skip this step and proceed to b.

a. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixedIP address.

b. Enter the /etc/rc.d/omud stop command and pressEnter to stop the omud.

c. Enter uninstall_bam in any directory of the OMUand press Enter.

d. The message Uninstall standby area. input Y tocontinue; input E to exit. is displayed. Enter Y touninstall the OMU applications on the standbyworkspace of the standby OMU.

e. Enter the uninstall_bam command and pressEnter.

f. The message Uninstall main area. input Y tocontinue; input E to exit. is displayed. Enter Y touninstall the OMU applications on the activeworkspace of the standby OMU.

2. Install OMU applications as instructed in Install OMUapplications of Scenario: Old OMU Running SuseLinux and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.



107

If... Then...

The OMU OS isWindows

1. Optional: Uninstall the OMU applications on the newOMU board.NOTE

If the new OMU board is installed with the OMU applications,perform this step to uninstall the OMU applications of anearlier version.

If the new OMU board is not installed with the OMUapplicaitons, skip this step and proceed to b.

a. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixedIP address.

b. Type the net stop omud command and pressEnter to stop the omud.

c. Click Start > Run and the Run interface isdisplayed.

d. In the Run interface, run the uninstall_bamcommand and click OK.

e. Type Y, and press Enter until the Uninstall OMUsucceed! message is displayed.

f. Go to 4 after uninstalling the OMU applications inthe standby workspace. Perform to 5 uninstall theOMU applications in the active workspace. Thistask is completed.

2. Install OMU applications as instructed in Install OMUapplications of Scenario: Old OMU RunningWindows and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.

2. Change IP addresses of the new OMU so that they match those of the replaced OMU

board, as instructed in Table 8-5.



108


If... Then...

The OMU OS isDopra Linux

1. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press Enter to navigate to the directorycontaining omutool.

2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IPaddresses of the replaced OMU board.l The ./omutool innercard IP address command is

used to change the fixed internal IP address.l The ./omutool innervip IP address command is

used to change the virtual internal IP address.l The ./omutool extercard IP address mask

(gateway) command is used to change the fixedexternal IP address and mask.

l The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask(gateway) command is used to change the virtualexternal IP address and subnet mask.

l Use the command ./omutool backupcard IPaddress to change the backup channel IP address ofthe active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa/OMUbboard.

l Use the command ./omutoolbackupcard_for_omuc IP address to change thebackup channel IP address of the active and standbyOMUs of the B_UPDATE0 Ethernet adapter on anOMUc board.

l Use the command ./omutoolbackupcard_for_omua IP address to change thebackup channel IP address of the active and standbyOMUs of the B_UPDATE1 Ethernet adapter on anOMUc board.

l The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used tochange the commissioning IP address.NOTE

Changing the debugging IP address immediatelydisconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board. Use thenew debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to theOMU board again.

l Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured withthe GBFD-511701 Radio Measurement DataInterface for Navigation feature and the BSC localIP address is used for communication between theOMU and VNP, you need to reconfigure the BSClocal IP address, VLAN IDs for communicationbetween the OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs forcommunication between the OMU and EMS/LMTbased on "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address



109

If... Then...

Installation Information." For details, seeConfiguring Radio Measurement Data Interface forNavigation in GBSS&RAN Feature ActivationGuide.

3. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and pressEnter to start the omud process.



110

If... Then...

The OMU OS is SuseLinux

1. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press Enter to navigate to thedirectory containing omutool.

2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IPaddresses of the replaced OMU board.l The ./omutool innercard IP address command is

used to change the fixed internal IP address.l The ./omutool innervip IP address command is

used to change the virtual internal IP address.l The ./omutool extercard IP address mask


l The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask(gateway) command is used to change the virtualexternal IP address and subnet mask.

l Use the command ./omutool backupcard IPaddress to change the backup channel IP address ofthe active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa/OMUbboard.

l The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used tochange the commissioning IP address.NOTE


l Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured withthe GBFD-511701 Radio Measurement DataInterface for Navigation feature and the BSC localIP address is used for communication between theOMU and VNP, you need to reconfigure the BSClocal IP address, VLAN IDs for communicationbetween the OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs forcommunication between the OMU and EMS/LMTbased on "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP AddressInstallation Information." For details, seeConfiguring Radio Measurement Data Interface forNavigation in GBSS&RAN Feature ActivationGuide.




111

If... Then...


1. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter toenter the OMU command mode.

2. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\version_a\bin\bam and press Enter to navigate to the directorycontaining omutool.

3. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IPaddresses of the replaced OMU board.l The omutool innercard IP address command is

used to change the fixed internal IP address.l The omutool innervip IP address is used to change

the virtual internal IP address.l The omutool extercard IP address subnet mask

(gateway IP address) command is used to changethe fixed external IP address and subnet mask.

l The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask(gateway IP address) command is used to changethe virtual external IP address and subnet mask.

l Use the command omutool backupcard IPaddress to change the backup channel IP address ofthe active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa/OMUbboard.

l The omutool debugcard IP address command isused to change the commissioning IP address.NOTE


4. Type the command net start omud to start the omudprogress.

3. Remove the debugging Ethernet cable from the OMU board panel.

l Install the operating system patch and upgrade the Ethernet adapter drive as shown in Table8-6.



112


If... Then...


Log in to http://support.huawei.com/support/ and chooseSoftware Center > Version Software > Wireless ProductLine > SingleRAN > SRAN O&M tools to download theOMU Driver Upgrade CHS ***.rar and get Upgrade Guideto OMU Linux Ethernet Adapter Driver and OMU driverupgrade tool. Please refer to BSC6900 Upgrade Guide to OMUO&M Panel Adapter Driver to upgrade the OMU adapterdriver.NOTE

Suse Linux Operating System has no patch.


Download and decpmpress the Upgrade Guide to OMUWindows Operating System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.rarfile from the release document. Decompress the packageand obtain the Upgrade Guide to OMU Windows OperatingSystem and Ethernet Adapter Driver.

l Restore OMU data.

1. Connect the LMT PC to the OMU external network.2. Log in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging Out of the

LMT. On the LMT, start the file manager. For detailed operations, see File Manager.3. Select the target file on the LMT PC and click Upload to upload the saved OMU

system data to the active workspace. Ensure that the upload path is the same as thebackup data download path.

4. Perform operations described in Table 8-7 based on the OMU OS type.



113


If... Then...


1. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IPaddress. For detailed operations, see Logging In to theOMU.

2. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and pressEnter to stop the omud process.

3. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/common/servicesand press Enter to navigate to the directory containingthe omu_backup_linker tool.

4. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and pressEnter to start the omu_backup_linker tool.

5. A message is displayed "Please input a validbkp_res_type :." Type restore and press Enter.

6. A message is displayed "Please input a validbackup file pathname : ." Type the backupfile save path and the file name and press Enter. Thesystem starts to restore data. A message will bedisplayed showing success or failure. For example,"Restore OMU database succeed!" may bedisplayed.




2. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and pressEnter to stop the omud process.

3. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/common/services and press Enter to navigate to thedirectory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.

4. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and pressEnter to start the omu_backup_linker tool.


6. A message is displayed "Please input a validbackup file pathname : ." Type the backupfile save path and the file name and press Enter. Thesystem starts to restore data. A message will bedisplayed showing success or failure. For example,"Restore OMU database succeed!" may bedisplayed.




114

If... Then...



2. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter toenter the OMU command mode.

3. Type the command net stop omud to stop the omudprogress.

4. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\common\services and press Enter to navigate to the directorycontaining the omu_backup_linker tool.

5. Type the command omu_backup_linker.exe and pressEnter to start the omu_backup_linker tool.


7. Type the backup file save path and the file name andpress Enter. The system starts to restore data. Amessage will be displayed showing success or failure.For example, "Restore OMU databasesucceed!" may be displayed.

8. Type the command net start omud to start the omudprogress.

l Go to 8.18.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.

----End

Scenario: Old OMU Board Running Dopra Linux and New OMU Board RunningSuse Linux/Windows

This section describes how to replace an OMU board of a BSC6900 configured with only oneOMU board when the OMU board to be replaced runs the Dopra Linux operating system (OS)and the new OMU board runs the Suse Linux/Windows OS.



NOTE


l A USB installation disk has been prepared. For detailed operations, see Preparing a USBStorage Device. The operation type is set to Install and OMU applications and patches areinstalled during the preparation.

ContextWhen the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it isrecommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.



115

This takes care of the user operation habit. To meet special requirements, do not switch the OSbut directly install OMU applications on the new OMU board by referring to Install OMUapplications of the new OMU. of Scenario: Old and New OMU Boards Running the SameOS.

If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance, skipprocedures for backing up and saving the data and obtain the latest backup data for restoring thedata. The following procedures take a functional OMU board as an example.





l Save the performance configuration files, SSL certificate files, license files, and OMUsystem data to the LMT PC.1. Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, seeFile Manager.2. Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click

Download.NOTE

Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming thatthe OMU active workspace is version_a:l Performance configuration files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas.

Only DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.l SSL certificate files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.l License files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\license.

l Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert a new one. For detailed operations, seeReplacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or Replacing anOMU board that is configured with old ejector levers.

l Use the USB installation disk to switch the OMU OS and install OMU applications.1. Optional: Ensure that the BIOS boot sequence of the OMU board is set to boot from

the USB disk. For detailed operations, see Setting the First Boot Device of the OMUto USB.

2. Insert the prepared USB installation disk into any USB port on the OMU panel.3. Remove and insert the OMU board to reset it.

NOTE

After the OMU board restarts, it automatically installs OS and software.

4. Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operatingsystem. Check the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whetherthe OMU operating system is installed successfully.



116

– If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicatorstatus. See Table 8-8.

– If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check theindicator status. See Table 8-9.NOTE

If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. Whenthis occurs, prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flashdrive to a new USB flash drive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.For information about how much time will be consumed during the OMU operating systeminstallation, see Table 1 in Preparing a USB Storage Device.

Table 8-8 Status of the indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operatingsystem installation

Board InstallationProcedure

SuccessfulInstallation

FailedInstallation

OMUc l The RUNindicatorblinks.

l The ALMindicatorblinks.

l The ACTindicatorblinks.

l The OFFLINEindicator is off.

l The RUNindicatorblinks.

l The ALMindicator is off.

l The ACTindicator is off.

l The OFFLINEindicatorblinks.

l The RUNindicator is off.




Table 8-9 Status of indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operatingsystem and OMU applications installation



FailedInstallation






l The ALMindicator issteady on oroff.

l The ACTindicator issteady on oroff.








117

NOTE

l When using an USB installation disk with the operation type set to Install, you must restore theOMU data.

l When using an USB installation disk with the operation type set to Switch, you do not need torestore the OMU data.

5. Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with the GBFD-511701 RadioMeasurement Data Interface for Navigation feature and the BSC local IP addressis used for communication between the OMU and VNP, you need to reconfigure theBSC local IP address, VLAN IDs for communication between the OMU and VNP,and VLAN IDs for communication between the OMU and EMS/LMT based on "OMUEthernet Adapter Team IP Address Installation Information." For details, seeConfiguring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation in GBSS&RANFeature Activation Guide.

l Restore OMU data.1. Log in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging Out of the



3. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP address. For detailedoperations, see Logging In to the OMU.

4. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop the omud process.5. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/common/services and press Enter to navigate to

the directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.6. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to start the

omu_backup_linker tool.7. A message is displayed "Please input a valid bkp_res_type :." Type

restore and press Enter.8. A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup file

pathname : ." Type the backup file save path and the file name and press Enter.The system starts to restore data. A message will be displayed showing success orfailure. For example, "Restore OMU database succeed!" may be displayed.

9. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.


----End

Scenario: Old OMU Running Suse Linux and New OMU Running Dopra Linux

This section describes how to replace the OMU on BSC6900 with a single OMU when theoperating system on the OMU to be replaced is Suse Linux and that on the new OMU is DopraLinux.


Out of the LMT.

l A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.



118

NOTE


Context

When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it isrecommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.This takes care of the user operation habit. To meet special requirements, do not switch the OSbut directly install OMU applications on the new OMU board by referring to Install OMUapplications of the new OMU. of Scenario: Old and New OMU Boards Running the SameOS.






l Save the performance configuration files, SSL certificate files, license files, and OMUsystem data to the LMT PC.

1. Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, seeFile Manager.

2. Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and clickDownload.

NOTE





l Install Suse Linux.

1. On the LMT PC, use EasyInstall to prepare an installation source for Suse Linux. Fordetails, see Preparations for Reinstalling the OMU Operating System and Creatingthe Operating System Installation Source.

2. Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on each of the new OMUs.



119

3. Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations,see Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers orReplacing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers.

4. Use EasyInstall to install Suse Linux. For details, see Installing the OMU OperatingSystem by Using the EasyInstall Software.

l Install OMU applications.1. Set the IP address of the local computer to the same network segment as the

commissioning IP address of the OMU.2. Connect to the debugging port of the OMU, and log in to the OMU through the

commissioning IP address. For details, see Uploading the OMU ApplicationInstallation Package to the OMU. (The file upload path is /BSC6000/data/mbsc/upgrade.)

3. Use the commissioning IP address to switch to the directory where the installationpackage is saved. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.– If the operating system is Dopra Linux, assume that OMU applications installation

package install_bam.sh is saved in /mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup. Enter the following command and press Enter.cd /mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup

– If the operating system is Suse Linux, assume that OMU applications installationpackage install_bam.sh is saved in /BSC6000/data/mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup. Enter the following command and pressEnter.cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup

4. Run the chmod +x ./install_bam.sh command to acquire the authority to run the ./install_bam.sh command.

5. Enter the ./install_bam.sh command and press Enter. The system prompts you totype the product mode, as shown:[2011-05-03 10:12:32] software integrality verify begin...[2011-05-03 10:12:42] software integrality verify end...

# The run mode of the product# GO:GSM only# UO:UMTS only# GU:GSM and UMTS# Please select one mode to install.Please input a valid run_mode :

NOTE

The software integrity of the OMU applications is checked before they are automatically installed.The OMU applications can be installed only if the check passes.

6. Enter the product running mode and press Enter. The system prompts you to type theoffice name, as shown:# The name of office# The name suggest range from 5 to 32 characters.# The characters suggest be letters, digits, "-"or "_".Please input a valid office_name :

7. Enter the office name and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the language,as shown:# The OMU language version. eg: eng/chsPlease input a valid version :

8. Enter the language and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the adminpassword, as shown:



120

# The "admin" user's password of OMU service.# The password must range from 6 to 32 characters and consist of only letters and figures.# Do not forget the password.# You can change the password later, but this password should be provided first.Please input a valid admin_password :

NOTEThe admin password is the initial password for the administrator to log in to the LMT.

9. Enter the admin password and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the FTPpassword, as shown:# The ftp user's password of OMU service# The password must range from 6 to 32(characters) and consist of only letters and figures.# Do not forget the password.# You can change it later, but this password should be provided first.Please input a valid ftp_password :

NOTEThe FTP password is customized. After the OMU applications are installed, you can accessthe FTP service with the FTP password.

10. Enter the FTP password and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the externalvirtual IP address, as shown:

# The extranet IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.# example: 192.168.1.9/255.255.255.0;192.168.1.1Please input a valid virtual_extranet_config :

NOTE

l If a fixed external network IP address has been configured for the OMU to be replaced, theentered external network virtual IP address must be in the same network segment as the fixedexternal network IP address for the OMU to be replaced.

l If a fixed external network IP address has not been configured for the OMU to be replaced, theentered external network virtual IP address can be set based on the actual plan.

11. Enter the external virtual IP address and press Enter. The system prompts you to typethe OMU system type, as shown:# The OMU system type. eg: Single/Dual# Single:Install stand-alone system# Dual:Install dual-OMU system. The dual-OMU system can effeciently increase the reliability of the OMU system.Please input a valid install_type :

12. Enter the OMU installation type based on the field configuration and press Enter.Table 1 describes the OMU installation types.

Table 8-10 Description

Parameter Description

Single When the BSC6900 is configured withone OMU board, install the OMUapplications on the board in single-OMU mode.

Dual When the BSC6900 is configured withtwo OMU boards, install OMUapplications on the board in dual-OMUmode.



121

13. The system asks you whether to continue with the installation, as shown:

Please affirm input information. input Y to continue; input E to exit. ->

14. Enter Y to install the OMU applications. When the messageInstall OMUsucceed! is displayed, the OMU applications are successfully installed.

l Change the IP addresses of the new OMUs to those of the replaced OMUs.1. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press

Enter to navigate to the directory containing omutool.2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses of the replaced OMU

board.– The ./omutool innercard IP address command is used to change the fixed internal

IP address.– The ./omutool innervip IP address command is used to change the virtual internal

IP address.– The ./omutool extercard IP address mask (gateway) command is used to change

the fixed external IP address and mask.– The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway) command is used to

change the virtual external IP address and subnet mask.– Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP address to change the backup channel

IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernetadapter on an OMUa/OMUb board.

– The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used to change the commissioning IPaddress.

NOTE

Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board.Use the new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the OMU board again.

– Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with the GBFD-511701 RadioMeasurement Data Interface for Navigation feature and the BSC local IPaddress is used for communication between the OMU and VNP, you need toreconfigure the BSC local IP address, VLAN IDs for communication between theOMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs for communication between the OMU and EMS/LMT based on "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address InstallationInformation." For details, see Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface forNavigation in GBSS&RAN Feature Activation Guide.

3. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.4. Remove the debugging Ethernet cable from the OMU board panel.

l Install the operating system patch and upgrade the Ethernet adapter drive. Log in to http://support.huawei.com/support/ and choose Software Center > Version Software >Wireless Product Line > SingleRAN > SRAN O&M tools to download the OMU DriverUpgrade CHS ***.rar and get Upgrade Guide to OMU Linux Ethernet Adapter Driverand OMU driver upgrade tool. Please refer to BSC6900 Upgrade Guide to OMU O&MPanel Adapter Driver to upgrade the OMU adapter driver.

NOTE

Suse Linux has no operation system patch.

l Recover the OMU data.1. Connect the LMT PC to the OMU external network.



122

2. Log in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging Out of theLMT. On the LMT, start the file manager. For detailed operations, see File Manager.

3. Select the target file on the LMT PC and click Upload to upload the saved OMUsystem data to the active workspace. Ensure that the upload path is the same as thebackup data download path.


5. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop the omud process.6. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/common/services and press

Enter to navigate to the directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.7. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to start the


restore and press Enter.9. A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup file

pathname : ." Type the backup file save path and the file name and press Enter.The system starts to restore data. A message will be displayed showing success orfailure. For example, "Restore OMU database succeed!" may be displayed.

10. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.l Go to 8.18.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.

----End

Scenario: Old OMU Running Windows and New OMU Running Dopra Linux

This section describes how to replace the OMU on BSC6900 with a single OMU when theoperating system on the OMU to be replaced is Windows and that on the new OMU is DopraLinux.



NOTE


Context

When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it isrecommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.This takes care of the user operation habit. To meet special requirements, do not switch the OSbut directly install OMU applications on the new OMU board by referring to Install OMUapplications of the new OMU. of Scenario: Old and New OMU Boards Running the SameOS.




123





l Save the performance configuration files, SSL certificate files, license files, and OMUsystem data to the LMT PC.

1. Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, seeFile Manager.

2. Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and clickDownload.

NOTE





l Install Windows.

1. On the local computer, use EasyInstall to prepare a Windows installation source. Fordetails, see Preparations for Reinstalling the OMU Operating System, Creating theOperating System Installation Source, and Creating the Installation Source of theSetWin Software and OS Patches.

2. Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on the new OMU.


4. Use EasyInstall to install Windows. For details, see Installing the OMU OperatingSystem Using the EasyInstall Software.

l Install OMU applications.

1. Set the IP address of the local computer to the same network segment as thecommissioning IP address of the OMU.

2. Upload OMU applications to the OMU.

a. (Optional) If patches are installed during the installation, delete the original patchfiles saved in the patch folder for OMU applications, copy the patches (forexample, the V900R01XC0XSPCXXX folder) saved on the local computer tothe patch folder for OMU applications.

Figure 8-11 show the directory structures of the patche installation package.



124

Figure 8-11 Directory structure of the patche installation package

b. Connect to the debugging Ethernet port of the OMU, and log in to the OMUthrough the commissioning IP address. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.

c. Under drive D on the OMU, create the \mbsc\upgrade folder, right-click it, andchoose Sharing and Security.

d. In the Properties dialog box, select Share this folder, set the read/write property,and then click OK.

e. On the local computer, choose Start > Run, enter \\OMU commissioning IPaddress. In the displayed dialog box, enter the username and password, and clickOK.

f. Copy OMU applications installation package from the local computer to the\mbsc\upgrade folder on the OMU.

3. Go to the V***R***C**\install\setup directory of the version installation packageand double-click install_bam.bat. The system prompts you to type the productrunning mode, as shown in the following:

NOTE

V***R***C** is an example of the version installation package. During installation, see the actualversion.[2011-05-03 10:12:32] software integrality verify begin...[2011-05-03 10:12:42] software integrality verify end...


NOTE


4. Enter the product running mode and press Enter. The system prompts you to typethe office name, as shown:# The name of office# The name must range from 5 to 32 characters.# The first character must be a letter and the subsequent characters can be letters, digits, "-"or "_".Please input a valid office_name :


6. Enter the language and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the adminpassword, as shown:# The "admin" user's password of OMU service.# The password must range from 6 to 32 characters and consist of only letters an



125

d figures.# Do not forget the password.# You can change the password later, but this password should be provided first.Please input a valid admin_password :Please input a valid Confirm password :

7. Enter the admin password and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the FTPpassword, as shown:# The ftp user's password of OMU service# The password must range from 6 to 32(characters) and consist of only letters and figures.# Do not forget the password.# You can change it later, but this password should be provided first.Please input a valid ftp_password :Please input a valid Confirm password :

8. Enter the ftp password and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the externalvirtual IP address, as shown:# The virtual extranet ip.Please input a valid virtual_extranet_ip :

NOTE



9. Enter the external virtual IP address and press Enter. The system prompts you totype the OMU system type, as shown:# The OMU system type. eg: Single/Dual# Single : Install stand-alone system# Dual : Install dual system. The dual-OMU system can effeciently increase the reliability of the OMU systemPlease input a valid install_type :






11. The system asks you whether to continue with the installation, as shown:Please affirm input information. input Y to continue; input E to exit. ->

12. Enter Y to install OMU applications. When the messageInstall OMUsucceed! is displayed, OMU applications are successfully installed.



126

l Change the IP addresses of the new OMUs to those of the OMUs to be replaced.1. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to enter the OMU command mode.2. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\version_a\bin\bam and press Enter to

navigate to the directory containing omutool.3. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses of the replaced OMU

board.– The omutool innercard IP address command is used to change the fixed internal

IP address.– The omutool innervip IP address is used to change the virtual internal IP address.– The omutool extercard IP address subnet mask (gateway IP address) command

is used to change the fixed external IP address and subnet mask.– The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway IP address) command

is used to change the virtual external IP address and subnet mask.– Use the command omutool backupcard IP address to change the backup channel


– The omutool debugcard IP address command is used to change thecommissioning IP address.

NOTE


4. Type the command net start omud to start the omud progress.5. Remove the debugging Ethernet cable from the OMU board panel.

l Download and decpmpress the Upgrade Guide to OMU Windows Operating Systemand Ethernet Adapter Driver.rar file from the release document. Obtain the UpgradeGuide to OMU Windows Operating System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.

l Recover the OMU data.1. Connect the LMT PC to the OMU external network.2. Log in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging Out of the



4. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to enter the OMU command mode.5. Type the command net stop omud to stop the omud progress.6. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\common\services and press Enter to

navigate to the directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.7. Type the command omu_backup_linker.exe and press Enter to start the


restore and press Enter.9. Type the backup file save path and the file name and press Enter. The system starts

to restore data. A message will be displayed showing success or failure. For example,"Restore OMU database succeed!" may be displayed.

10. Type the command net start omud to start the omud progress.



127


----End

8.18.3 Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU in Dual-System ModeThis section describes how to replace the standby OMU board when two OMUs are configuredon BSC6900.

Contextl The new OMUs can use the same operating system as the OMUs to be replaced or use

another operating system, but the active and standby OMUs must use the same operatingsystem.

l The new OMUs must be of the same type as the OMUs to be replaced.l In dual-system mode, if the active OMU fails, the system automatically performs a

switchover. Therefore, only the standby OMU needs to be replaced.

Replacing the standby OMU board in dual-system mode occurs in one the following scenarios:

Scenario: Old and New OMUs Running the Same Operating SystemThis section describes how to replace the standby OMU on BSC6900 configured with two OMUswhen the OMU to be replaced and the new OMU have the same operating system.

Prerequisitesl A new OMU board is ready, and it is of the same type as the board to be replaced.

NOTE


Context



Procedure

Step 1 Run the MML command STP DATASYNC to stop the synchronization between the activeOMU and the standby one.

Step 2 Run the MML command DSP OMU to check the status to make sure the synchronizationbetween the active OMU and the standby one is stopped.

Step 3 Go to standby OMU, choose Start > Run, type cmd and press Enter to enter the commandmode. Run net stop omud to stop the omud serviece.



128

Step 4 Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations, seeReplacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMUboard that is configured with old ejector levers.

Step 5 Perform operations in Table 8-12 based on the operating system.



129


If... Then...

The OMU operatingsystem is Dopra Linuxor Suse Linux

1. Optional: Uninstall the OMU applications on the new OMUboard.NOTE

If OMU applications have been installed on the new OMU board,perform this step to uninstall the OMU applications of an earlierversion.

If no OMU application is installed on the new OMU board, skip thisstep and proceed to b.

a. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external IPaddress or the commissioning IP address. For details, seeLogging In to the OMU.

b. Enter the /etc/rc.d/omud stop command and press Enterto stop the omud.

c. Enter uninstall_bam in any directory of the OMU andpress Enter.

d. The message Uninstall standby area. input Y tocontinue; input E to exit. is displayed. Enter Y to uninstallthe OMU applications on the standby workspace of thestandby OMU.

e. Enter the uninstall_bam command and press Enter.f. The message Uninstall main area. input Y to continue;

input E to exit. is displayed. Enter Y to uninstall the OMUapplications on the active workspace of the standby OMU.

2. Install OMU applications. For details, see Install OMUapplications. in Scenario: Old OMU Running Suse Linuxand New OMU Running Dopra Linux.

3. Change the IP addresses of the new OMU.l The OMU operating system is Suse Linux, refer to Change

the IP addresses of the new OMU to those of the OMUto be replaced.

l The OMU operating system is Dopra Linuxa. Enter the cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam command

and press Enter to go to the directory where the omutoolprogram is saved.

b. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IPaddresses of the replaced OMU board.– The ./omutool innercard IP address command is

used to change the fixed internal IP address.– The ./omutool innervip IP address command is

used to change the virtual internal IP address.– The ./omutool extercard IP address mask




130

If... Then...

– The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask(gateway) command is used to change the virtualexternal IP address and subnet mask.

– Use the command ./omutool backupcard IPaddress to change the backup channel IP address ofthe active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa/OMUbboard.

– The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used tochange the commissioning IP address.NOTE


– Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured withthe GBFD-511701 Radio Measurement DataInterface for Navigation feature and the BSC localIP address is used for communication between theOMU and VNP, you need to reconfigure the BSClocal IP address, VLAN IDs for communicationbetween the OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs forcommunication between the OMU and EMS/LMTbased on "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP AddressInstallation Information." For details, seeConfiguring Radio Measurement Data Interface forNavigation in GBSS&RAN Feature ActivationGuide.

4. Install the operating system patch and upgrade Ethernet adapterdriver when the operating system is Suse Linux. Log in tohttp://support.huawei.com/support/ and choose SoftwareCenter > Version Software > Wireless Product Line >SingleRAN > SRAN O&M tools to download the OMUDriver Upgrade CHS ***.rar and get Upgrade Guide toOMU Linux Ethernet Adapter Driver and OMU driver upgradetool. Please refer to BSC6900 Upgrade Guide to OMU O&MPanel Adapter Driver to upgrade the OMU adapter driver.NOTE




131

If... Then...

The OMU operatingsystem is Windows

1. Optional: Uninstall the OMU applications on the new OMUboard.NOTE

If OMU applications have been installed on the new OMU board,perform this step to uninstall the OMU applications of an earlierversion.

If no OMU application is installed on the new OMU board, skip thisstep and proceed to b.

a. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external IPaddress or the commissioning IP address. For details, seeLogging In to the OMU.

b. Type the net stop omud command and press Enter to stopthe omud.

c. Click Start > Run and the Run interface is displayed.d. In the Run interface, run the uninstall_bam command and

click OK.e. Type Y, and press Enter until the Uninstall OMU

succeed! message is displayed.f. Go to 4 after uninstalling the OMU applications in the

standby workspace. Perform to 5 to uninstall the OMUapplications in the active workspace. This task iscompleted.

2. Install OMU applications. For details, see Install OMUapplications in Scenario: Old OMU Running Windows andNew OMU Running Dopra Linux.

3. Change the IP addresses of the new OMU board. For details,see Change the IP addresses of the new OMU to those ofthe OMU to be replaced in Scenario: Old OMU RunningWindows and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.

4. Download and decpmpress the Upgrade Guide to OMUWindows Operating System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.rarfile from the release document. Decompress the packageand obtain the Upgrade Guide to OMU Windows OperatingSystem and Ethernet Adapter Driver.

Step 6 Go to 8.18.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.

----End

Scenario: Old OMU Running Dopra Linux and New OMU Running Suse Linux/Windows

This section describes how to replace the standby OMU on BSC6900 configured with two OMUswhen the operating system on the OMUs to be replaced is Dopra Linux and that on the newOMUs is Suse Linux/Windows.



132


NOTE



ContextWhen the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it isrecommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.This takes care of the user operation habit.



Procedure

Step 1 Run the MML command STP DATASYNC to stop the synchronization between the activeOMU and the standby one.

Step 2 Run the MML command DSP OMU to check the status to make sure the synchronizationbetween the active OMU and the standby one is stopped.

Step 3 Go to standby OMU, choose Start > Run, type cmd and press Enter to enter the commandmode. Run net stop omud to stop the omud serviece.

Step 4 Connect a USB installation disk to a USB port on the new OMU.

Step 5 Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations, seeReplacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMUboard that is configured with old ejector levers.

Step 6 Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating system. Checkthe status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether the OMU operating systemis installed successfully.l If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator status. See

Table 8-13.l If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator

status. See Table 8-14.



133

NOTE

If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. When this occurs,prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flash drive to a new USB flashdrive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.For information about how much time will be consumed during the OMU operating system installation, seeTable 1 in Preparing a USB Storage Device.

Table 8-13 Status of the indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating systeminstallation



Failed Installation

OMUc l The RUNindicator blinks.

l The ALMindicator blinks.

l The ACTindicator blinks.


l The RUNindicator blinks.



l The OFFLINEindicator blinks.





Table 8-14 Status of indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating system andOMU applications installation



Failed Installation






l The ALMindicator issteady on or off.

l The ACTindicator issteady on or off.






Step 7 Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with the GBFD-511701 Radio MeasurementData Interface for Navigation feature and the BSC local IP address is used for communicationbetween the OMU and VNP, you need to reconfigure the BSC local IP address, VLAN IDs forcommunication between the OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs for communication between theOMU and EMS/LMT based on "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address InstallationInformation." For details, see Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation inGBSS&RAN Feature Activation Guide.


----End



134

Scenario: Old OMU Running Suse Linux and New OMU Running Dopra Linux

This section describes how to replace the standby OMU on BSC6900 configured with two OMUswhen the operating system on the OMUs to be replaced is Suse Linux and that on the new OMUsis Dopra Linux.


NOTE


Context

When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it isrecommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.This takes care of the user operation habit.



Procedurel Stop the synchronization between the active OMU and the standby one and the omud

serviece.

1. Run the MML command STP DATASYNC to stop the synchronization between theactive OMU and the standby one.

2. Run the MML command DSP OMU to check the status to make sure thesynchronization between the active OMU and the standby one is stopped.

3. Go to standby OMU, choose Start > Run, type cmd and press Enter to enter thecommand mode. Run net stop omud to stop the omud serviece.

l Install Suse Linux.

1. On the LMT PC, use EasyInstall to prepare an installation source for Suse Linux. Fordetails, see Preparations for Reinstalling the OMU Operating System and Creatingthe Operating System Installation Source.

2. Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on each of the new OMUs.


4. Use EasyInstall to install Suse Linux. For details, see Installing the OMU OperatingSystem by Using the EasyInstall Software.




135


2. Connect to the debugging port of the OMU, and log in to the OMU through thecommissioning IP address. For details, see Uploading the OMU ApplicationInstallation Package to the OMU. (The file upload path is /BSC6000/data/mbsc/upgrade.)

3. Use the commissioning IP address to switch to the directory where the installationpackage is saved. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.

– If the operating system is Dopra Linux, assume that OMU applications installationpackage install_bam.sh is saved in /mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup. Enter the following command and press Enter.cd /mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup

– If the operating system is Suse Linux, assume that OMU applications installationpackage install_bam.sh is saved in /BSC6000/data/mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup. Enter the following command and pressEnter.cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup


5. Enter the ./install_bam.sh command and press Enter. The system prompts you totype the product mode, as shown:[2011-05-03 10:12:32] software integrality verify begin...[2011-05-03 10:12:42] software integrality verify end...


NOTE


6. Enter the product running mode and press Enter. The system prompts you to type theoffice name, as shown:# The name of office# The name suggest range from 5 to 32 characters.# The characters suggest be letters, digits, "-"or "_".Please input a valid office_name :


8. Enter the language and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the adminpassword, as shown:# The "admin" user's password of OMU service.# The password must range from 6 to 32 characters and consist of only letters and figures.# Do not forget the password.# You can change the password later, but this password should be provided first.Please input a valid admin_password :



136

NOTEThe admin password is the initial password for the administrator to log in to the LMT.


NOTEThe FTP password is customized. After the OMU applications are installed, you can accessthe FTP service with the FTP password.



NOTE



11. Enter the external virtual IP address and press Enter. The system prompts you to typethe OMU system type, as shown:# The OMU system type. eg: Single/Dual# Single:Install stand-alone system# Dual:Install dual-OMU system. The dual-OMU system can effeciently increase the reliability of the OMU system.Please input a valid install_type :









137


l Change the IP addresses of the new OMUs to those of the OMUs to be replaced.1. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press

Enter to navigate to the directory containing omutool.2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses of the replaced OMU

board.– The ./omutool innercard IP address command is used to change the fixed internal

IP address.– The ./omutool innervip IP address command is used to change the virtual internal

IP address.– The ./omutool extercard IP address mask (gateway) command is used to change

the fixed external IP address and mask.– The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway) command is used to

change the virtual external IP address and subnet mask.– Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP address to change the backup channel


– The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used to change the commissioning IPaddress.

NOTE


– Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with the GBFD-511701 RadioMeasurement Data Interface for Navigation feature and the BSC local IPaddress is used for communication between the OMU and VNP, you need toreconfigure the BSC local IP address, VLAN IDs for communication between theOMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs for communication between the OMU and EMS/LMT based on "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address InstallationInformation." For details, see Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface forNavigation in GBSS&RAN Feature Activation Guide.

3. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.l Install the operating system patch and upgrade the adapter driver.Log in to http://

support.huawei.com/support/ and choose Software Center > Version Software >Wireless Product Line > SingleRAN > SRAN O&M tools to download the OMU DriverUpgrade CHS ***.rar and get Upgrade Guide to OMU Linux Ethernet Adapter Driverand OMU driver upgrade tool. Please refer to BSC6900 Upgrade Guide to OMU O&MPanel Adapter Driver to upgrade the OMU adapter driver.

NOTE

Suse Linux has no operating system patch.


----End



138

Scenario: Old OMU Running Windows and New OMU Running Dopra LinuxThis section describes how to replace the standby OMU on BSC6900 configured with two OMUswhen the operating system on the OMU to be replaced is Windows and that on the new OMUis Dopra Linux.


NOTE


ContextWhen the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it isrecommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.This takes care of the user operation habit.



Procedurel Stop the synchronization between the active OMU and the standby one and the omud

serviece.1. Run the MML command STP DATASYNC to stop the synchronization between the

active OMU and the standby one.2. Run the MML command DSP OMU to check the status to make sure the

synchronization between the active OMU and the standby one is stopped.3. Go to standby OMU, choose Start > Run, type cmd and press Enter to enter the

command mode. Run net stop omud to stop the omud serviece.l Install Windows.

1. On the local computer, use EasyInstall to prepare a Windows installation source. Fordetails, see Preparations for Reinstalling the OMU Operating System, Creating theOperating System Installation Source, and Creating the Installation Source of theSetWin Software and OS Patches.

2. Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on the new OMU.3. Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations,

see Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers orReplacing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers.

4. Use EasyInstall to install Windows. For details, see Installing the OMU OperatingSystem Using the EasyInstall Software.




139


2. Upload OMU applications to the OMU.

a. (Optional) If patches are installed during the installation, delete the original patchfiles saved in the patch folder for OMU applications, copy the patches (forexample, the V900R01XC0XSPCXXX folder) saved on the local computer tothe patch folder for OMU applications.Figure 8-12 show the directory structures of the patche installation package.

Figure 8-12 Directory structure of the patche installation package

b. Connect to the debugging Ethernet port of the OMU, and log in to the OMUthrough the commissioning IP address. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.

c. Under drive D on the OMU, create the \mbsc\upgrade folder, right-click it, andchoose Sharing and Security.

d. In the Properties dialog box, select Share this folder, set the read/write property,and then click OK.

e. On the local computer, choose Start > Run, enter \\OMU commissioning IPaddress. In the displayed dialog box, enter the username and password, and clickOK.

f. Copy OMU applications installation package from the local computer to the\mbsc\upgrade folder on the OMU.

3. Go to the V***R***C**\install\setup directory of the version installation packageand double-click install_bam.bat. The system prompts you to type the productrunning mode, as shown in the following:

NOTE

V***R***C** is an example of the version installation package. During installation, see the actualversion.[2011-05-03 10:12:32] software integrality verify begin...[2011-05-03 10:12:42] software integrality verify end...


NOTE


4. Enter the product running mode and press Enter. The system prompts you to typethe office name, as shown:# The name of office# The name must range from 5 to 32 characters.# The first character must be a letter and the subsequent characters can be lett



140

ers, digits, "-"or "_".Please input a valid office_name :


6. Enter the language and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the adminpassword, as shown:# The "admin" user's password of OMU service.# The password must range from 6 to 32 characters and consist of only letters and figures.# Do not forget the password.# You can change the password later, but this password should be provided first.Please input a valid admin_password :Please input a valid Confirm password :

7. Enter the admin password and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the FTPpassword, as shown:# The ftp user's password of OMU service# The password must range from 6 to 32(characters) and consist of only letters and figures.# Do not forget the password.# You can change it later, but this password should be provided first.Please input a valid ftp_password :Please input a valid Confirm password :

8. Enter the ftp password and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the externalvirtual IP address, as shown:# The virtual extranet ip.Please input a valid virtual_extranet_ip :

NOTE



9. Enter the external virtual IP address and press Enter. The system prompts you totype the OMU system type, as shown:# The OMU system type. eg: Single/Dual# Single : Install stand-alone system# Dual : Install dual system. The dual-OMU system can effeciently increase the reliability of the OMU systemPlease input a valid install_type :







141




12. Enter Y to install OMU applications. When the messageInstall OMUsucceed! is displayed, OMU applications are successfully installed.

l Change the IP addresses of the new OMUs to those of the OMUs to be replaced.

1. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to enter the OMU command mode.

2. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\version_a\bin\bam and press Enter tonavigate to the directory containing omutool.

3. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses of the replaced OMUboard.

– The omutool innercard IP address command is used to change the fixed internalIP address.

– The omutool innervip IP address is used to change the virtual internal IP address.

– The omutool extercard IP address subnet mask (gateway IP address) commandis used to change the fixed external IP address and subnet mask.

– The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway IP address) commandis used to change the virtual external IP address and subnet mask.

– Use the command omutool backupcard IP address to change the backup channelIP address of the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernetadapter on an OMUa/OMUb board.

– The omutool debugcard IP address command is used to change thecommissioning IP address.

NOTE


4. Type the command net start omud to start the omud progress.

l Download and decpmpress the Upgrade Guide to OMU Windows Operating Systemand Ethernet Adapter Driver.rar file from the release document. Obtain the UpgradeGuide to OMU Windows Operating System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.


----End

8.18.4 Scenario: Replacing OMUa or OMUb Boards with OMUcBoards

This section describes how to replace an OMUa or OMUb board with an OMUc board.



142

Contextl Replacing an OMU board will disconnect the OMU board from the host boards. System

operation data during this period will lose.l In this scenario, the operating system (OS) of the OMUc board is Dopra Linux OS after

the replacement no matter which OS is used by the board to be replaced because the OMUcboard can only support Dopra Linux OS.

l When an OMUa or OMUb board in single-OMU mode is damaged, two OMUc boards arerecommended to replace the OMUa or OMUb board.

OMUc boards can be used to replace OMUa or OMUb boards. The replacement scenarios areas follows:

Scenario: Replacing Two OMUa or OMUb Boards with Two OMUc Boards

This section describes how to replace two OMUa or OMUb boards with two OMUc boards.


Out of the LMT.l Two new OMUc boards are ready.

Context

Co-Existence of OMU Boardsl Short-term co-existence of OMU boards is supported. When an OMUc board is used to

replace an OMUa or OMUb board, the OMUc board and the OMUa or OMUb board canbe inserted into the slots and co-exist for a short period, so that data can be transferred fromthe OMUa or OMUb board to the OMUc board.

l Long-term co-existence of OMU boards in slots is not supported because the active andstandby OMU boards must be of the same type for commercial delivery in existing network.For example, both active and standby OMU boards must be OMUa boards or OMUc boards.



Procedure

Step 1 Run the DSP OMU command to query information about the OMU and record the queriedinformation in Records of the OMU Application Installation Information.Record Sheet of OMU Software Installation Information of the OMU board to be replacedrecords the following information:l Administrator password



143

l Password of system administrator adminl Password of FTP user FtpUsrl External fixed IP address, external virtual IP address, internal fixed IP address, internal virtual

IP address, debugging IP address, and backup channel IP address of the OMU board

NOTE

This document uses the OMUa board as an example.

Step 2 Stop the omud process on the standby OMU board and shut down the OMU operating system(OS).

1. Log in to the standby OMU. For detailed operations, see Logging in to the OMU in theBSC6900 GU OMU Administration Guide.

2. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop command to stop the omud process.3. Run the poweroff command to shut down the OMU OS.

Step 3 Run the RMV BRD command to remove the standby OMUa or OMUb boards.

Step 4 Run the ADD BRD command to add an OMUc board in the slot where the removed standbyOMU board originally resides, that is, the slot marked green in Figure 8-13.

Step 5 Remove the standby OMU board. For detailed operations, see Replacing an OMU board thatis configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU board that is configured withold ejector levers.

Step 6 Install the first OMUc board in the active and standby slots of the OMUa or OMUb board. Theseslots are the green slots shown in Figure 8-13.

The OMUa or OMUb board is twice the thickness of other OMU boards. Two OMUa orOMUb boards are installed in the slots in blue, yellow, and red frames, as shown in Figure8-13. Between two adjacent OMUa or OMUb boards, one is active and the other is standby.

The first OMUc board used for replacement must be installed in the green slots in the blue,yellow, and red frames.

Example 1: Two OMUa boards are installed in the slots 20 through 23 before replacement. Slots20 and 21 house the active OMUa board. Slot 22 and slot 23 are for the standby OMUa board.Perform the following operations to replace OMU boards:

1. Remove the OMUa board installed in slots 22 and 23.2. Install the first OMUc board in slot 23.

Example 2: Two OMUa boards are installed in the slots 20 through 23 before replacement. Slot20s and 21 house the standby OMUa board. Slots 22 and 23 house the active OMUa board.Perform the following operations to replace OMU boards:

1. Remove the OMUa board installed in slots 20 and 21.2. Install the first OMUc board in slot 21.



144

Figure 8-13 Slots housing the first OMUc board

Step 7 Connect the PC and the ETH2 port on the OMU board with network cable.

Step 8 Set the IP address of the PC to be on the same network segment with the ETH2 port. The initialIP address of the ETH2 port is 192.168.6.50 or 192.168.6.60, the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.

Step 9 Logging in to the OMU.1. Run the SSH terminal, for example, PuTTY, on the PC, and type the debugging IP address

of the OMU.2. Logging in to the OMU. For detailed operations, see Logging in to the OMU in the BSC6900

GU OMU Administration Guide.

Step 10 Uploading the OMU application installation package to the OMU. For details, see Uploadingthe OMU Application Installation Package to the OMU in the BSC6900 GU OMUAdministration Guide.

Step 11 Installing the OMU applications in the active workspace.1. Navigate to the directory where the OMU application installation package is saved.

Assume that the OMU application installation package install_bam.sh is saved in /mbsc/upgrade/V***R***C**/install/setup. Run the following command and press Enter:cd /mbsc/upgrade/V***R***C**/install/setup


3. Enter the ./install_bam.sh command and press Enter. The system prompts you to type theproduct mode, as shown:[2011-05-03 10:12:32] software integrality verify begin...[2011-05-03 10:12:42] software integrality verify end...


NOTE

The software integrity of the OMU applications is checked before they are automatically installed. TheOMU applications can be installed only if the check passes.

4. Enter the product running mode and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the officename, as shown:



145

# The name of office# The name suggest range from 5 to 32 characters.# The characters suggest be letters, digits, "-"or "_".Please input a valid office_name :

5. Enter the office name and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the language, asshown:# The OMU language version. eg: eng/chsPlease input a valid version :

6. Enter the language and press Enter. The system prompts you to type the admin password,as shown:# The "admin" user's password of OMU service.# The password must range from 6 to 32 characters and consist of only letters and figures.# Do not forget the password.# You can change the password later, but this password should be provided first.Please input a valid admin_password :Please input a valid Confirm password :

NOTE

The admin password is the initial password for the administrator to log in to the LMT.

The admin password is that of the former saved standby OMUa board.


NOTEThe FTP password is customized. After the OMU applications are installed, you can access the FTPservice with the FTP password.



NOTEExternal network virtual IP uses the saved former information of standby OMUa board. After theOMU applications are installed, you can change the IP addresses and subnet masks of the OMUEthernet adapters with omutool.

9. Enter the external virtual IP address and press Enter. The system prompts you to type theOMU system type, as shown:# The OMU system type. eg: Single/Dual# Single:Install stand-alone system# Dual:Install dual-OMU system. The dual-OMU system can effeciently increase the reliability of the OMU system.Please input a valid install_type :

10. Type Dual, and press Enter.11. The system asks you whether to continue with the installation, as shown:

Please affirm input information. input Y to continue; input E to exit. ->




146

Step 12 Change IP addresses of OMU Ethernet adapters and their subnet masks

1. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press Enter to navigate to thedirectory containing omutool.

2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses of the replaced OMUboard.

l The ./omutool innercard IP address command is used to change the fixed internal IPaddress.

l The ./omutool innervip IP address command is used to change the virtual internal IPaddress.

l The ./omutool extercard IP address mask (gateway) command is used to change thefixed external IP address and mask.

l Use the command ./omutool backupcard_for_omuc IP address to change the backupchannel IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the B_UPDATE0 Ethernetadapter on an OMUc board.

l Use the command ./omutool backupcard_for_omua IP address to change the backupchannel IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the B_UPDATE1 Ethernetadapter on an OMUc board.

l Record the information about the OMU applications installation in Information RecordSheet of OMU Software Installation.

It is recommended that the backup channel IP addresses of the active and standby OMUson the Ethernet adapter B_UPDATE0 of the OMUc board be set to 192.168.9.60. Inaddition, set the backup channel IP addresses of the active and standby OMUs on theEthernet adapter B_UPDATE1 to the backup channel IP address of the OMUa board thathas been removed in Records of the OMU Application Installation Information.

Step 13 Record the information about the OMU applications installation in Information Record Sheetof OMU Software Installation.

Step 14 Only when BSC6900 is configured with the GBFD-511701 Radio Measurement DataInterface for Navigation feature and the BSC local IP address is used for communicationbetween the OMU and VNP, you need to reconfigure the BSC local IP address, VLAN IDs forcommunication between the OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs for communication between theOMU and EMS/LMT based on "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address InstallationInformation." For details, see Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation inGBSS&RAN Feature Activation Guide.

Step 15 Start the omud on the standby OMU board. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud start command and pressEnter to start the omud.

Step 16 Wait 10 minutes while the data of OMUa or OMUb board and the OMUc board is beingsynchronized.

After the OMU OS, OMU applications and patches are installed, the data of the OMUa orOMUb board and the OMUc board is synchronized automatically.

Step 17 Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When Data-syncstate is Data synchronization is successful, run the SWP OMU command to swap the OMUboards.

Step 18 After the active/standby OMU switchover is complete, run the DSP OMU command to checkthe data synchronization progress. When Data-sync state is Data synchronization is



147

successful, stop the OMUd process on the OMUa board, shut down the OMU OS, referring toStep 2 .

Step 19 Repeat Step 5 to Step 6 to remove the OMUa board, and install OMUc board.

Step 20 Repeat operations in Step 7 to Step 11 to install OMU applications.

Step 21 Change IP addresses of OMU Ethernet adapters and their subnet masks by referring to operationsin Step 12.

NOTE

It is recommended that the backup channel IP addresses of the active and standby OMUs on the Ethernet adapterB_UPDATE0 of the OMUc board be set to 192.168.9.50. In addition, set the backup channel IP addresses ofthe active and standby OMUs on the Ethernet adapter B_UPDATE1 to the backup channel IP address of theOMUa board that has been removed in Records of the OMU Application Installation Information.

Step 22 Only when BSC6900 is configured with the GBFD-511701 Radio Measurement DataInterface for Navigation feature and the BSC local IP address is used for communicationbetween the OMU and VNP, you need to reconfigure the BSC local IP address, VLAN IDs forcommunication between the OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs for communication between theOMU and EMS/LMT based on "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address InstallationInformation." For details, see Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation inGBSS&RAN Feature Activation Guide.

Step 23 Wait 10 minutes while the data of two OMUc boards is being synchronized.

Step 24 Run the RMV BRD command to remove the OMUa or OMUb boards which have put out inStep 19.

Step 25 Run the ADD BRD command to add the OMUc board which have installed in Step 19.

Step 26 Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When Data-syncstate is Data synchronization is successful, start 8.18.6 Common Operation for ReplacingOMU Board.

----End

Scenario: Replacing an OMUa or OMUb Board with Two OMUc BoardsThis section describes how to replace an OMUa or OMUb board with two OMUc boards.

Prerequisitesl Two new OMUc boards are ready.l You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging

Out of the LMT.l A USB installation disk has been prepared. For detailed operations, see Preparing a USB

Storage Device. The operation type is set to Install and OMU applications and patches areinstalled during the preparation.

ContextIf the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance(O&M), obtain the latest backup data for restoring the data on the new OMU board.

Co-Existence of OMU Boards



148

l Short-term co-existence of OMU boards is supported. When an OMUc board is used toreplace an OMUa or OMUb board, the OMUc board and the OMUa or OMUb board canbe inserted into the slots and co-exist for a short period, so that data can be transferred fromthe OMUa or OMUb board to the OMUc board.

l Long-term co-existence of OMU boards in slots is not supported because the active andstandby OMU boards must be of the same type for commercial delivery in existing network.For example, both active and standby OMU boards must be OMUa boards or OMUc boards.

Two solutions can be adopted for the OMU replacement in terms of synchronizing data duringthe replacement:

l Solution 1: When slots beside the OMUa or OMUb board in single-OMU mode are emptyand available, the OMUa or OMUb board can be replaced by the OMUc board throughshort-term co-existence of OMU boards.

l Solution 2: When slots beside the OMUa or OMUb board in single-OMU mode are notempty and available, the data of the OMUa or OMUb board can be copied onto the OMUcboard to complete replacement.



Procedurel Check whether slots beside the OMUa or OMUb board are empty and available for

installing the OMUc board.

The OMUa or OMUb board is twice the thickness of other OMU boards. Two OMUa orOMUb boards are installed in the slots in blue, yellow, and red frames, as shown in Figure8-14. Between two adjacent OMUa or OMUb boards, one is active and the other is standby.

The first OMUc board used for replacement must be installed in the green slots in the blue,yellow, and red frames.

Example 1: An OMUa board is installed in the slots 20 and 21 before replacement.Replacing operations are as follows:

1. Install the first OMUc board in slot 23.

2. Remove the OMUa board installed in slots 20 and 21.

3. Install the second OMUc board in slot 22.

Example 2: An OMUa board is installed in the slots 22 and 23 before replacement. Performthe following operations to replace OMU boards:

1. Install the first OMUc board in slot 21.

2. Remove the OMUa board installed in slots 22 and 23.

3. Install the second OMUc board in slot 20.



149

Figure 8-14 Slots housing the first OMUc board

If... Then...

Slots beside the OMUa or OMUb board areempty and available for installing theOMUc board

Start Replacement Through Co-Existence of OMU Boards.

Slots beside the OMUa or OMUb are notavailable for installing the OMUc board

Start Replacement by Copying Data ofOMU boards.

l Replacement Through Co-Existence of OMU Boards

1. Run the BKP DB command with Path of Backup File and File Name set toappropriate values to back up data and save it in the specified directory in the OMUhard disk.

2. Change the OMU working mode to dual-OMU mode.

a. Log in to the active and standby OMU. For detailed operations, see Logging into the OMU.

b. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop command to stop the omud process.

c. Enter cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press Enter tonavigate to the directory that contains the omutool process.

d. Run the ./omutool dualmode dual command to set the OMU working mode todual-OMU.

e. Enter /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.

3. In five minutes after the OMU board operating before replacement is started, run theDSP OMU command. When the Operational state is Active normal, install the firstOMUc board in the slot shown in Figure 8-14.

4. Insert the prepared USB installation disk into any USB port on the OMU panel.

NOTE

The OMUc board is set to boot from the USB port by default at delivery.




150

5. Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operatingsystem. Check the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whetherthe OMU operating system is installed successfully.– If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator

status. See Table 8-17.– If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check the

indicator status. See Table 8-18.NOTE

If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. Whenthis occurs, prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flashdrive to a new USB flash drive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.For information about how much time will be consumed during the OMU operating systeminstallation, see Table 1 in Preparing a USB Storage Device.

Table 8-17 Status of the indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMUoperating system installation



FailedInstallation
















FailedInstallation






l The ALMindicator issteady on oroff.

l The ACTindicator issteady on oroff.








151

6. Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with the GBFD-511701 RadioMeasurement Data Interface for Navigation feature and the BSC local IP addressis used for communication between the OMU and VNP, you need to reconfigure theBSC local IP address, VLAN IDs for communication between the OMU and VNP,and VLAN IDs for communication between the OMU and EMS/LMT based on "OMUEthernet Adapter Team IP Address Installation Information." For details, seeConfiguring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation in GBSS&RANFeature Activation Guide.

7. Adjust all the IP addresses and masks on the standby OMU board and ensure there isno conflict between the internal network fixed IP addresses, the external network fixedIP addresses, and the backup channel IP addresses of the active and standby OMUboards. All these IP addresses meet the requirements for planning IP addresses. Fordetails about how to adjust IP addresses, see Changing the IP Addresses and Masksfor the new OMU Boards.

8. Wait 10 minutes while the data of OMUa or OMUb board and the OMUc board isbeing synchronized.

After the OMU OS, OMU applications and patches are installed, the data of the OMUaor OMUb board and the OMUc board is synchronized automatically.

9. Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. WhenData-sync state is Data synchronization is successful, run the SWP OMU commandto swap the OMU boards.

10. Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. WhenData-sync state is Data synchronization is successful, stop the omud process on theOMUa board according to the OS type of the OMUa or OMUb board, and shut downthe OMU OS by following operations.

If... Then...

The Suse Linux OS or Dopra Linux OSis used

1. Log in to the active and standbyOMU. For detailed operations, seeLogging in to the OMU.

2. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stopcommand to stop the omud process.

3. Run the poweroff command to shutdown the OMU OS.

The Windows OS is used 1. Log in to the active and standbyOMU. For detailed operations, seeLogging in to the OMU.

2. Choose Start > Run, Enter cmdandthen press Enter. The OMUcommand interface is displayed.

3. Run the net stop omud command tostop the omud process.

4. Choose Start > Shutdown. SelectShutdown from the drop-down listbox to shut down the OMU OS.



152

11. Remove the standby OMUa or OMUb board. For detailed operations, see Replacingan OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMUboard that is configured with old ejector levers.

12. Install the second OMUc board in the active and standby slots of the first OMUc board.These slots are the green slots shown in Figure 8-15.

The green slots in Figure 8-15 are the slots for housing the second OMUc board.

Figure 8-15 Slots housing the second OMUc board

13. Insert the prepared USB installation disk into any USB port on the OMU panel.14. Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating

system. Check the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whetherthe OMU operating system is installed successfully.

15. Adjust all the IP addresses and masks on the standby OMU board and ensure there isno conflict between the internal network fixed IP addresses, the external network fixedIP addresses, and the backup channel IP addresses of the active and standby OMUboards. All these IP addresses meet the requirements for planning IP addresses. Fordetails about how to adjust IP addresses, see Changing the IP Addresses and Masksfor the new OMU Boards.

16. Wait 10 minutes while the data of two OMUc boards is being synchronized.17. Run the RMV BRD command to remove an OMUa\OMUb board.18. Run the ADD BRD command to add two OMUc boards.19. Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When

Data-sync state is Data synchronization is successful, start 8.18.6 CommonOperation for Replacing OMU Board.

l Replacement by Copying Data of OMU Boards1. Run the BKP DB command with Path of Backup File and File Name set to

appropriate values to back up data and save it in the specified directory in the OMUhard disk.

2. Save the performance configuration file, SSL license file, and OMU system data tothe local PC.

a. Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, see Starting the filemanager on the LMT.



153

b. Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and clickDownload.

NOTE

Run the LST OMUAREA command to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming that the OMUactive workspace is version_a:

l Performance configuration files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas directory.Only DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.

l SSL certificate files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\cert directory.

l License files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\license directory.

3. Stop the omud process on the standby OMU board and shut down the OMU OS.

If... Then...

The Suse Linux OS or Dopra Linux OSis used

1. Log in to the active and standbyOMU. For detailed operations, seeLogging in to the OMU.

2. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stopcommand to stop the omud process.

3. Run the poweroff command to shutdown the OMU OS.

The Windows OS is used 1. Log in to the active and standbyOMU. For detailed operations, seeLogging in to the OMU.

2. Choose Start > Run, Enter cmdandthen press Enter. The OMUcommand interface is displayed.

3. Run the net stop omud command tostop the omud process.

4. Choose Start > Shutdown. SelectShutdown from the drop-down listbox to shut down the OMU OS.

4. Run the RMV BRD command to remove an OMUa or OMUb board.5. Run the ADD BRD command to add an OMUc board.6. Remove the OMU board to be replaced. For detailed operations, see Replacing an

OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMUboard that is configured with old ejector levers.

7. Insert the two prepared USB flash drives into a USB port on two new OMU boardpanels, respectively.

8. Install the two new OMU boards in the slots for the active and standby OMUc boards.

NOTE



9. Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operatingsystem. Check the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whetherthe OMU operating system is installed successfully.



154

– If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicatorstatus. See Table 8-17.

– If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check theindicator status. See Table 8-18.

NOTE

If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. Whenthis occurs, prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flashdrive to a new USB flash drive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.

For information about how much time will be consumed during the OMU operating systeminstallation, see Table 1 in Preparing a USB Storage Device.

Table 8-19 Status of the indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMUoperating system installation

Board SuccessfulInstallation

Failed Installation

OMUc l The RUN indicatorblinks.

l The ALM indicator isoff.

l The ACT indicator isoff.


l The RUN indicator isoff.

l The ALM indicatorblinks.




Board SuccessfulInstallation

Failed Installation

OMUc l The RUN indicatorblinks.

l The ALM indicator issteady on or off.

l The ACT indicator issteady on or off.


l The RUN indicatorblinks.

l The ALM indicatorblinks.



10. Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with the GBFD-511701 RadioMeasurement Data Interface for Navigation feature and the BSC local IP addressis used for communication between the OMU and VNP, you need to reconfigure theBSC local IP address, VLAN IDs for communication between the OMU and VNP,and VLAN IDs for communication between the OMU and EMS/LMT based on "OMUEthernet Adapter Team IP Address Installation Information." For details, see



155

Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation in GBSS&RANFeature Activation Guide.

11. Log in to the LMT and start the file manager.

12. Select the target file on the local PC and click Upload to upload Step 1 or the mostrecently saved OMU data to the active workspace on the OMU hard disk. Ensure thatthe upload path is the same as the backup download path.

Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the active workspace. Assumingthat the active workspace is version_a:

– Certificate files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.

– License files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\license.

– OMU system data files are saved in \mbsc\bam\version_a\data\backup.


14. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop the omud process.

15. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/common/services and press Enter to navigate tothe directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.

16. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to start theomu_backup_linker tool.

17. A message is displayed "Please input a valid bkp_res_type :." Typerestore and press Enter.

18. A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup filepathname : ." Type the backup file save path and the file name and press Enter.The system starts to restore data. A message will be displayed showing success orfailure. For example, "Restore OMU database succeed!" may be displayed.

19. Enter /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process on the standbyOMUc board.

20. Run the DSP OMU command in five minutes after the database is restored and theOMUc board is started. When Operational state is Active normal, log in to thesecond OMUc board, enter /etc/rc.d/omud start, and press Enter to start the omudprocess of the second OMUc board.

21. Wait 10 minutes while the data of two OMUc boards is being synchronized.

22. Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. WhenData-sync state is Data synchronization is successful, start 8.18.6 CommonOperation for Replacing OMU Board.

----End

Scenario: Replacing an OMUa or OMUb Board with an OMUc Board

This section describes how to replace an OMUa or OMUb board with an OMUc board.

Prerequisitesl Two new OMUc boards are ready.

l You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and LoggingOut of the LMT.



156


Context

If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance(O&M), obtain the latest backup data for restoring the data on the new OMU board.



Procedure

Step 1 Run the BKP DB command with Path of Backup File and File Name set to appropriate valuesto back up data and save it in the specified directory in the OMU hard disk.

Step 2 Save the performance configuration file, SSL license file, and OMU system data to the local PC.

1. Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, see Starting the file manageron the LMT.

2. Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click Download.

NOTE

Run the LST OMUAREA command to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming that the OMU activeworkspace is version_a:

l Performance configuration files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas directory. OnlyDefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.

l SSL certificate files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\cert directory.

l License files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\license directory.

Step 3 Stop the omud process on the standby OMU board and shut down the OMU operating system(OS).

If... Then...

The Suse Linux OS or Dopra Linux OS isused

1. Log in to the active and standby OMU. Fordetailed operations, see Logging in to theOMU.

2. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop command tostop the omud process.

3. Run the poweroff command to shut downthe OMU OS.



157

If... Then...

The Windows OS is used 1. Log in to the active and standby OMU. Fordetailed operations, see Logging in to theOMU.

2. Choose Start > Run, Enter cmdand thenpress Enter. The OMU commandinterface is displayed.

3. Run the net stop omud command to stopthe omud process.

4. Choose Start > Shutdown. SelectShutdown from the drop-down list box toshut down the OMU OS.

Step 4 Run the RMV BRD command to remove an OMUa or OMUb board.

Step 5 Run the ADD BRD command to add an OMUc board.

Step 6 Remove the OMU board to be replaced. For detailed operations, see Replacing an OMU boardthat is configured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU board that is configuredwith old ejector levers.

Step 7 Insert the prepared USB installation disk into any USB port on the OMU panel.

Step 8 Inset the new OMU board in the slots where the OMUa or OMUb board is installed.

NOTE



Step 9 Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating system. Checkthe status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether the OMU operating systemis installed successfully.l If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator status. See

Table 8-21.l If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator

status. See Table 8-22.

NOTE

If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. When this occurs,prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flash drive to a new USB flashdrive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.

For information about how much time will be consumed during the OMU operating system installation, seeTable 1 in Preparing a USB Storage Device.



158

Table 8-21 Status of the indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating systeminstallation



Failed Installation













Table 8-22 Status of indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating system andOMU applications installation



Failed Installation






l The ALMindicator issteady on or off.

l The ACTindicator issteady on or off.






Step 10 Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with the GBFD-511701 Radio MeasurementData Interface for Navigation feature and the BSC local IP address is used for communicationbetween the OMU and VNP, you need to reconfigure the BSC local IP address, VLAN IDs forcommunication between the OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDs for communication between theOMU and EMS/LMT based on "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address InstallationInformation." For details, see Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation inGBSS&RAN Feature Activation Guide.

Step 11 Log in to the LMT and start the file manager.

Step 12 Select the target file on the local PC and click Upload to upload Step 2 or the most recentlysaved OMU data to the active workspace on the OMU hard disk. Ensure that the upload path isthe same as the backup download path.

Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the active workspace. Assuming that theactive workspace is version_a:

l Certificate files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.



159

l License files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\license.

l OMU system data files are saved in \mbsc\bam\version_a\data\backup.

Step 13 Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP address. For detailed operations, seeLogging In to the OMU.

Step 14 Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop the omud process.

Step 15 Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/common/services and press Enter to navigate to thedirectory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.

Step 16 Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to start the omu_backup_linker tool.

Step 17 A message is displayed "Please input a valid bkp_res_type :." Type restoreand press Enter.

Step 18 A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup file pathname : ."Type the backup file save path and the file name and press Enter. The system starts to restoredata. A message will be displayed showing success or failure. For example, "Restore OMUdatabase succeed!" may be displayed.

Step 19 Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.

Step 20 Start 8.18.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.

----End

8.18.5 Scenario: Replacing Active and Standby OMUs in Dual-System Mode

This section describes how to replace the active and standby OMUs when two OMUs areconfigured as an active/standby pair on BSC6900. In this scenario, OMU operation andmaintenance of the host boards are interrupted.


NOTE



Contextl Replace both the active and standby boards only when they are both faulty. Otherwise,

perform the operations described in 8.18.3 Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU inDual-System Mode. If OMUc boards are used instead of OMUa/OMUb boards, seeScenario: Replacing Two OMUa or OMUb Boards with Two OMUc Boards.

l The new OMUs can use the same operating system as the OMUs to be replaced or anotheroperating system, but the active and standby OMUs must use the same operating system.

l The new OMUs must be of the same type as the OMUs to be replaced.



160

l When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced,it is recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMUboard. This takes care of the user operation habit.



Procedure

Step 1 Remove the active and standby OMUs by referring to Replacing an OMU board that isconfigured with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU board that is configured with oldejector levers.

Step 2 Perform the following operations based on the operating system:

Option Description

If the OMU operatingsystem is Dopra Linux

1. Connect a USB installation disk to a USB port on each of the newOMUs.

2. Install the new OMUs into the slots for the active and standbyOMUs.

3. After one or two minutes, the USB installation disks startinstallation. Check the status of the indicators on the OMU panelsto determine whether installation is complete. For details aboutindicator status, see Table 1 and Table 2 in Scenario: Old OMUBoard Running Dopra Linux and New OMU Board RunningSuse Linux/Windows

4. Perform the following operations based on the USB installationdisk type:l If the operation type of the installation disk is Install, perform

Step 5.l If the installation type of the USB installation disks is

Switch, go to 8.18.6 Common Operation for ReplacingOMU Board without needing to restore OMU data.



161

Option Description

If the OMU operatingsystem is Suse Linux

1. On the local computer, use EasyInstall to prepare an installationsource for Suse Linux. For details, see Preparations forReinstalling the OMU Operating System and Creating theOperating System Installation Source.

2. Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port oneach of the new OMUs.

3. Install a new OMU in the slot for the active OMU. For details, seeReplacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejectorlevers or Replacing an OMU board that is configured with oldejector levers.

4. Use EasyInstall to install Suse Linux. For details, see Installingthe OMU Operating System by Using the EasyInstall Software.

5. Repeat steps a through d to install another OMU into the slot forthe standby OMU and install Suse Linux.

6. Install OMU applicationss on the active and standby OMUs. Fordetails, see Install OMU applications. in Scenario: Old OMURunning Suse Linux and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.

If the OMU operatingsystem is Windows

1. On the local computer, use EasyInstall to prepare an installationsource for Windows. For details, see Preparations for Reinstallingthe OMU Operating System, Creating the Operating SystemInstallation Source and Creating the Installation Source of theSetWin Software and OS Patches.

2. Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port oneach of the new OMUs.

3. Install a new OMU in the slot for the active OMU. For details, seeReplacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejectorlevers or Replacing an OMU board that is configured with oldejector levers.

4. Use EasyInstall to install Windows. For details, see Installing theOMU Operating System Using the EasyInstall Software.

5. Repeat steps a through d to install another OMU into the slot forthe standby OMU and install Suse Linux.

6. Install OMU applicationss on the active and standby OMUs. Fordetails, see Install OMU applications. in Scenario: Old OMURunning Windows and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.

Step 3 Change the IP addresses of the new OMUs to those of the OMUs to be replaced.



162

Option Description

If the OMU operatingsystem is Dopra Linux

1. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and pressEnter to navigate to the directory containing omutool.

2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addressesof the replaced OMU board.l The ./omutool innercard IP address command is used to

change the fixed internal IP address.l The ./omutool innervip IP address command is used to

change the virtual internal IP address.l The ./omutool extercard IP address mask (gateway)

command is used to change the fixed external IP address andmask.

l The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway)command is used to change the virtual external IP address andsubnet mask.

l Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP address tochange the backup channel IP address of the active and standbyOMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa/OMUb board.

l Use the command ./omutool backupcard_for_omuc IPaddress to change the backup channel IP address of the activeand standby OMUs of the B_UPDATE0 Ethernet adapter onan OMUc board.

l Use the command ./omutool backupcard_for_omua IPaddress to change the backup channel IP address of the activeand standby OMUs of the B_UPDATE1 Ethernet adapter onan OMUc board.

l The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used to change thecommissioning IP address.NOTE

Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMTPC from the OMU board. Use the new debugging IP address to connectthe LMT PC to the OMU board again.

l Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with theGBFD-511701 Radio Measurement Data Interface forNavigation feature and the BSC local IP address is used forcommunication between the OMU and VNP, you need toreconfigure the BSC local IP address, VLAN IDs forcommunication between the OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDsfor communication between the OMU and EMS/LMT basedon "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address InstallationInformation." For details, see Configuring RadioMeasurement Data Interface for Navigation in GBSS&RANFeature Activation Guide.

3. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to startthe omud process.



163

Option Description

NOTEAfter the IP address of the active OMU is set, log in to the standby OMU andrepeat the previous steps.

If the OMU operatingsystem is Suse Linux

1. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press Enter to navigate to the directory containingomutool.

2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addressesof the replaced OMU board.l The ./omutool innercard IP address command is used to

change the fixed internal IP address.l The ./omutool innervip IP address command is used to

change the virtual internal IP address.l The ./omutool extercard IP address mask (gateway)

command is used to change the fixed external IP address andmask.

l The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway)command is used to change the virtual external IP address andsubnet mask.

l Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP address tochange the backup channel IP address of the active and standbyOMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa/OMUb board.

l The ./omutool debugcard IP address is used to change thecommissioning IP address.NOTE


l Optional: Only when BSC6900 is configured with theGBFD-511701 Radio Measurement Data Interface forNavigation feature and the BSC local IP address is used forcommunication between the OMU and VNP, you need toreconfigure the BSC local IP address, VLAN IDs forcommunication between the OMU and VNP, and VLAN IDsfor communication between the OMU and EMS/LMT basedon "OMU Ethernet Adapter Team IP Address InstallationInformation." For details, see Configuring RadioMeasurement Data Interface for Navigation in GBSS&RANFeature Activation Guide.

3. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to startthe omud process.

NOTEAfter the IP address of the active OMU is set, log in to the standby OMU andrepeat the previous steps.



164

Option Description

If the OMU operatingsystem is Windows

1. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to enter the OMUcommand mode.

2. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\version_a\bin\bam andpress Enter to navigate to the directory containing omutool.

3. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addressesof the replaced OMU board.l The omutool innercard IP address command is used to

change the fixed internal IP address.l The omutool innervip IP address is used to change the virtual

internal IP address.l The omutool extercard IP address subnet mask (gateway IP

address) command is used to change the fixed external IPaddress and subnet mask.

l The ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway IPaddress) command is used to change the virtual external IPaddress and subnet mask.

l Use the command omutool backupcard IP address to changethe backup channel IP address of the active and standby OMUsof the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa/OMUb board.

l The omutool debugcard IP address command is used tochange the commissioning IP address.NOTE


4. Type the command net start omud to start the omud progress.NOTE

After the IP address of the active OMU is set, log in to the standby OMU andrepeat the previous steps.

Step 4 Install the operating system patch and upgrade the Ethernet adapter drive as shown in Table8-23.


If... Then...


Log in to http://support.huawei.com/support/ and choose SoftwareCenter > Version Software > Wireless Product Line >SingleRAN > SRAN O&M tools to download the OMU DriverUpgrade CHS ***.rar and get Upgrade Guide to OMU LinuxEthernet Adapter Driver and OMU driver upgrade tool. Pleaserefer to BSC6900 Upgrade Guide to OMU O&M Panel AdapterDriver to upgrade the OMU adapter driver.NOTE




165

If... Then...


Download and decpmpress the Upgrade Guide to OMUWindows Operating System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.rarfile from the release document. Decompress the package andobtain the Upgrade Guide to OMU Windows Operating Systemand Ethernet Adapter Driver.

Step 5 Remove the debugging Ethernet cable from the OMU board panel.

Step 6 Connect the LMT PC to the OMU external network.

Step 7 Download the latest backup data from the M2000 to the local computer For details, see SecurityManagement in M2000 Product Documentation.

Step 8 Log in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging Out of the LMT. Onthe LMT, start the file manager. For detailed operations, see File Manager.

Step 9 Select the target file on the local computer and then click Upload file to upload the most recentlysaved OMU data to the OMU hard disk. Ensure that the upload path is consistent with thedownload path of the backup data and the data is uploaded to the active workspace.

Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the active workspace. Assuming that theactive workspace is version_a:

l Certificate files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.l License files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\license.l OMU system data files are saved in \mbsc\bam\version_a\data\backup.

Step 10 Restore OMU data based on the operating system.



166

Option Description


1. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external networkIP address. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.

2. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stopthe omud process.

3. Refer to Steps a and B to log in to the active OMU and end theomud process.

4. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/common/services and pressEnter to navigate to the directory containing theomu_backup_linker tool.

5. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter tostart the omu_backup_linker tool.


7. A message is displayed "Please input a valid backupfile pathname : ." Type the backup file save path and thefile name and press Enter. The system starts to restore data. Amessage will be displayed showing success or failure. Forexample, "Restore OMU database succeed!" may bedisplayed.

8. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start to start omud on theactive OMU.

9. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external networkIP address. For details, refer to Logging In to the OMU.

10.Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start to start omud on thestandby OMU.



167

Option Description



2. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stopthe omud process.

3. Refer to Steps a and B to log in to the active OMU and end theomud process.

4. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/common/services and press Enter to navigate to the directory containingthe omu_backup_linker tool.

5. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter tostart the omu_backup_linker tool.


7. A message is displayed "Please input a valid backupfile pathname : ." Type the backup file save path and thefile name and press Enter. The system starts to restore data. Amessage will be displayed showing success or failure. Forexample, "Restore OMU database succeed!" may bedisplayed.

8. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start to start omud on theactive OMU.


10.Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start to start omud on thestandby OMU.



168

Option Description



2. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to enter the OMUcommand mode.

3. Type the command net stop omud to stop the omud progress.4. Refer to Steps a through c to log in to the active OMU and end

the omud process.5. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\common\services and

press Enter to navigate to the directory containing theomu_backup_linker tool.

6. Type the command omu_backup_linker.exe and press Enter tostart the omu_backup_linker tool.


8. Type the backup file save path and the file name and pressEnter. The system starts to restore data. A message will bedisplayed showing success or failure. For example, "RestoreOMU database succeed!" may be displayed.

9. Run net start omud to start omud on the active OMU.10.Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external network

IP address. For details, refer to Logging In to the OMU.11.Run net start omud to start omud on the standby OMU.


----End

8.18.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU BoardThis section describes the common operation after replacing OMU board, including queryingthe OMU working status, modifying the name of the OMU, setting the time information of theOMU, and setting the mode of the network adapter.

Procedure

Step 1 Optional: When the OMU runs the Dopra Linux operating system, set the OMU status to thesame status as that before the replacement based on the result recorded in Step 1 and Step 2.For details, see Disabling OMU route forwarding and Disabling root user login with SSH.

Step 2 Log in to the LMT by referring to Log in to the LMT.

Step 3 Run the MML command DSP OMU to query such information as OMU running status, fixedIP addresses, virtual IP addresses, data synchronization state, internal network connection state,external network connection state, and backup channel connection state.



169

If... Then...

l One OMU board isconfigured and itsOperational state is Normal

l Two OMU boards areconfigured and theirOperational state is Activenormal and Standby normalrespectively


Operational state is Fault Contact Huawei technical support.

Step 4 Based on Data-sync state queried in Step 3, do as follows:

If... Then...

Data-sync state is not Data synchronizationis successful

Clear alarms by referring toALM-20701 OMU Failure Switchoverand ALM-20704 OMU DataSynchronization Failure. Go to Step 5after the alarms are cleared.

Data-sync state is Data synchronization issuccessful

Perform operations described in Step5.

Step 5 Run the MML commands LST VER and LST PATCHVER to query whether the OMUsoftware version and patch version are correct.

If... Then...

They are correct Perform operations described in Step 6.

They are incorrect Obtain the OMU version software and patch softwareagain and install them.

Step 6 Run the MML command DSP OMUMODULE to query the status of the OMU processes.

If... Then...

State is Active or Stopped l In dual-OMU mode, go to Step 7.l In single-OMU mode, go to Step 8.

State is Abnormal Contact Huawei technical support.

Step 7 (For OMU boards in dual-OMU mode only) Run the MML command CMP OMUDATA tocompare data about active and standby OMU boards. Check whether alarm data, performancedata, and configuration data are consistent between the active and standby OMU boards.



170

If... Then...

The data is inconsistent 1. Run the MML command STR DATASYNC to startdata synchronization.

2. Perform operations described in Step 8.

The data is consistent Perform operations described in Step 8.

Step 8 Run the MML command CMP LICENSE to check whether the running license on host boardsis consistent with that on the OMU board.

If... Then...

The licenses are inconsistent 1. Resolve the problem by referring to ALM-20734License Inconsistency Between OMU and Host.


The licenses are consistent Perform operations described in Step 9.

Step 9 Run the MML command CMP BRDVER to check whether the running version on host boardsis consistent with that on the OMU board.

If... Then...

The software versions areinconsistent

1. Resolve the problem by referring to ALM-20733Software Version Inconsistency Between OMU andHost.


The software versions areconsistent


Step 10 Run the MML command ACT CRC to check whether the configuration data on host boards isconsistent with that on the OMU board.

If... Then...

The configuration data isinconsistent

1. Resolve the problem by referring to ALM-20736 DataInconsistency Between OMU and Host.


The configuration data isconsistent


Step 11 Run the MML command LST BRD to query Slot No. and Board Type of the OMU board.



171

If... Then...

The board type is inconsistentbefore and after the OMU boardreplacement

1. Run the MML command RMV BRD to removeconfigurations of the replaced OMU board.

2. Run the MML command ADD BRD to addconfigurations of the new OMU board.


The board type is consistentbefore and after the OMU boardreplacement


Step 12 Enter the command omutool hostname OMU name to modify the name of the OMU.

Step 13 Run the MML command LST TZ to query time zone and daylight saving time of the OMUboard.

If... Then...

The time zone and daylightsaving time of the OMU isinconsistent with the local time

1. Run the MML command SET TZ to set the timeinformation of the OMU.


The time zone and daylightsaving time of the OMU isconsistent with the local time


Step 14 Run the MML command DSP TIME to query Time of the OMU board.

If... Then...

The time of the OMU isinconsistent with the local time

1. Run the MML command SET TIME to set the timeinformation of the OMU.


The time of the OMU isconsistent with the local time


Step 15 Set the mode of the network adapter according to the router combined with OMU. For thedetailed setting method, please refer to Setting the Link Mode of the External OMU EthernetAdapter when the OS is Dopra. Refer to Setting the Link Mode for External OMU EthernetAdapters when the OS is Windows.Refer toSetting the Link Mode for External OMU EthernetAdapters when the OS is Suse.Normally the default value is self-adaption. Set the OMU port as100Mb/ Full Duplex only when the switchboard is forced to be 100Mb/full duplex.

Step 16 View the device panel on the LMT and check the status of all devices.



172

If... Then...

No abnormal device state isintroduced by the replacement

The replacement is complete.

An abnormal device state isintroduced by the replacement

Contact Huawei technical support.

----End



8.19 Replacing a PAMU BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty PAMU board. The PAMU board is hot-swappable.It takes about ten minutes to replace the board.


or bag.l A new PAMU board is ready.l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.



173

Context




Procedure

Step 1 Record the status of the mute switch of the PAMU to be replaced.For the position of the mute switch, see Panel of the PAMU Board.

Step 2 Set all bits of the DIP switch SW1 on the new PAMU to ON, as shown in Figure 8-16.

Figure 8-16 Setting of the DIP switch on the PAMU

Step 3 Loosen the screws on the monitoring board panel of the power distribution box with a Phillipsscrewdriver, as shown in Figure 8-17.



174

Figure 8-17 Removing the monitoring board panel of the power distribution box

1 Monitoring board panel of the power distribution box 2 Pan head screw M3 3 PAMU board

Step 4 Hold the monitoring board panel and remove the board from the power distribution box.

Step 5 Loosen the screws fixing the monitoring board panel to the PAMU board with a Phillipsscrewdriver and remove the PAMU. as shown in Figure 8-18.

Figure 8-18 Removing the PAMU board

1 Monitoring board panel of the power distribution box 2 Pan head screw M3 3 PAMU board

Step 6 Put the PAMU board in the ESD box or bag.

Step 7 Fix the panel to the PAMU board and fasten the screws.

Step 8 Insert the new PAMU board along the guide rails.

Step 9 Fasten the screws fixing the monitoring board panel to the power distribution box.

Step 10 The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinksevery other 0.125s.For details about the state of the LEDs on the board, see LEDs on the PAMU Board.



175

NOTE

If the RUN LED blinks every other 0.25s or the ALM LED is ON, remove the PAMU and install it againto ensure that the PAMU is in full contact with the backplane.

Step 11 When the RUN LED blinks every other second, you can infer that the board works properly.

Step 12 Set the mute switch on the new PAMU according to the recorded settings.

Step 13 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.If an alarm is reported, locate and rectify the fault according to the alarm information.

----End


NOTE

You can obtain the bar code of the board on the PCB plate of the faulty board.

8.20 Replacing a PEUa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty PEUa board. The PEUa board is hot-swappable.It takes about eight minutes to replace a PEUa board.


screwdriver, and ESD box or bag.l A new PEUa board is ready.l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.



176

Context




CAUTIONl Replacing the standby PEUa has no adverse effect on the system. Replacing the PEUa board

that works independently, however, disrupts services carried on this board.l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the PEUa board, the

ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when youreplace the PEUa board.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the PEUa board to be replaced.

If... Then...



NOTE





177

If... Then...





Step 3 Run the DSP IPPATH command to query the status of board to be replaced.

If... Then...


2. Go to Step 4.


Step 4 Check whether the labels on the E1/T1 cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to thePEUa are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improperconnection after the board is replaced.

Step 5 Disconnect the clock cable. Loosen the captive screws from the E1/T1 cable connector with aflat-head screwdriver and disconnect the E1/T1 cable.

Step 6 Remove the PEUa board to be replaced by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board.

Step 7 Check whether the settings of the DIP switches on the new board are correct by referring to DIPSwitches on the PEUa Board.

If... Then...




Step 9 Connect the E1/T1 cable and clock cable by referring to the labels.




178

If... Then...




If... Then...



2. Go to Step 10.


Go to Step 12.


If... Then...


Go to Step 13.




NOTE




----End

Follow-up ProcedureRecord the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obviousphysical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packinga board, pay attention to the following points:



179

l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


8.21 Replacing a POUa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty POUa board. The POUa board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.


screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.l A new POUa board is ready.l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context




CAUTIONl Replacing the standby POUa has no adverse effect on the system. Replacing the POUa board

that works independently, however, disrupts services carried by the subrack that houses theboard.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the POUa board, theongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when youreplace the POUa board.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the POUa board to be replaced.



180

If... Then...



NOTE


Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the POUa board to be replaced.

If... Then...





Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the POUa board tobe replaced.

If... Then...


Go to Step 4.



181

If... Then...

The ports are configured in active/standby mode, and the ports are active,

1. Run the DSP MSP command to query theMSP status.l If the MSP is not started, run the ACT

MSP command to activate the MSP.l If the MSP has been started, go to 3.2.

2. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switchthe active port to standby status.l If the active port is located in a slot with a

even number, set MSPCMD to MS(Manual switchover from working linkto protection link).

l If the active port is located in a slot withan odd number, setMSPCMD to LOP(Lockout of Protection).


Before activating the MSP, ensure that the local endand the peer end have the same protection mode.

The ports are configured in active/standby mode, and the ports are standby,

Go to Step 5.


If... Then...


2. Go to Step 5.


Step 5 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to thePOUa are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improperconnection after the board is replaced.

Step 6 Remove the optical cables and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them withthe dustfree cotton cloth or the fiber cleaner.


Step 8 Check whether the settings of the DIP Switches on the POUa Board of the standby board arecorrect.



182

If... Then...







If... Then...




If... Then...



2. Go to Step 12.


Go to Step 14.


If... Then...


Go to Step 15.



183

If... Then...




NOTE





----End

Follow-up Procedure

Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obviousphysical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packinga board, pay attention to the following points:l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.l Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.l When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


8.22 Replacing a POUc BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty POUc board. The POUc board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.


screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.l A new POUc board is ready.



184


Context




CAUTIONl Replacing the standby POUc board has no adverse effect on the system. Replacing the POUc

board that works independently, however, disrupts services carried by the subrack that housesthe board.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the POUc board, theongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when youreplace the POUc board.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the POUc board to be replaced.

If... Then...



NOTE


Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the POUc board to be replaced.



185

If... Then...



Run this command during off-peak hours, for instance, atmidnight.


Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the POUc board tobe replaced.

If... Then...


Go to Step 4.

The ports are configured in active/standby mode, and the ports are active,

1. Run the DSP MSP command to query theMSP status.l If the MSP is not started, run the ACT

MSP command to activate the MSP.l If the MSP has been started, go to 3.2.

2. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switchthe active port to standby status.l If the active port is located in a slot with a

even number, set MSPCMD to MS(Manual switchover from working linkto protection link).

l If the active port is located in a slot withan odd number, setMSPCMD to LOP(Lockout of Protection).


Before activating the MSP, ensure that the local endand the peer end have the same protection mode.

The ports are configured in active/standby mode, and the ports are standby,

Go to Step 5.




186

If... Then...


2. Go to Step 5.


Step 5 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to thePOUc are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improperconnection after the board is replaced.








If... Then...




If... Then...



2. Go to Step 11.


Go to Step 13.




187

If... Then...


Go to Step 14.




3. Go to Step 11.

NOTE





----End

Follow-up Procedure







8.23 Replace an SAUa/SAUc BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty SAUa/SAUc board. The SAUa/SAUc board ishot-swappable. It takes about 16 minutes to replace the SAUa/SAUc board.



188

Prerequisitesl The tools used for replacing the SAUa/SAUc board are ready. The required tools are as

follows: ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box/bag.l You have prepared a new SAUa or SAUc board.l The SAUa/SAUc board to be replaced is disabled.

ContextThe following items of the new SAUa/SAUc board must be consistent with those of the SAUa/SAUc board to be replaced:

l Password of the administrator of the operating systeml Internal and external fixed IP addresses of the new SAUa/SAUc boardl PC name of the new SAUa/SAUc board

CAUTIONReplacing the SAUa/SAUc board that works independently will disrupt the communicationbetween the host boards and the SAUa/SAUc, which results in system data loss.

Procedure

Step 1 Wear the ESD wrist strap and connect the ground core of the wrist strap to the ESD jack on thecabinet.

Step 2 Remove the SAUa/SAUc board to be replaced.1. Loosen the captive screw on the SAUa/SAUc board counterclockwise with a screwdriver,

as shown in A of Figure 8-19.



189

Figure 8-19 Uninstalling the SAUa/SAUc board

NOTE

The preceding figure takes an SAUa board as an example. The procedure for an SAUc board issimilar.

2. Press and hold the two locking buttons, flip outward the ejector levers on the SAUa/SAUcboard panel to unlock them, and rotate them outward. The SAUa/SAUc board is separatedfrom the backplane, as shown in part B of Figure 8-19.

NOTE

Turning outwards the ejector levers on the SAUa/SAUc board gives a power-off sign to the SAUa/SAUc board. The SAUa/SAUc board automatically shuts down the operating system and stops theread/write operations on the hard disk. Then, the OFFLINE/OFL LED on the SAUa/SAUc board ison steady. In indicates that the SAUa/SAUc board is powered off.

3. Remove the Ethernet cable, mouse cable, keyboard cable, and monitor cable (if configured)from the SAUa/SAUc board after the OFFLINE/OFL LED flashes fast and then is steadyblue.

4. Remove the SAUa/SAUc board to be replaced along the guide rail of the subrack, as shownin C of Figure 8-19.



190

Step 3 Install the new SAUa/SAUc board.

1. Press and hold the two locking buttons of the new board, flip outward the ejector levers toseparate them from the self-locking latch, and rotate them until they cannot be rotated, asshown in part A of Figure 8-20.

2. Slide the new SAUa/SAUc board along the guide rails into the subrack, as shown in B ofFigure 8-20.

Figure 8-20 Installing the SAUa/SAUc board

NOTE

l The preceding figure takes an SAUa board as an example. The procedure for an SAUc board issimilar.

l The SAUa/SAUc is preferentially inserted into slots that meet the requirements. For details, seeSAUa Board or SAUc Board.

3. Turn the ejector levers on the SAUa/SAUc board inwards until they are in position, asshown in C of Figure 8-20.

4. Tighten the captive screw clockwise with a screwdriver, as shown in D of Figure 8-20.

The new SAUa/SAUc board loads automatically and the RUN LED blinks (0.125s on and0.125s off).

5. Install the cables by referring to the labels.



191

Step 4 Install the SAU Software. Configure the PC name and IP addresses of the new SAUa/SAUcboard to ensure that they are the same as those of the replaced SAUa/SAUc board.For details, see the SAU User Guide of Nastar documents.

Step 5 Confirm that the SAUa/SAUc board works properly.1. Run the DSP SAU command to query the status of the new SAUa/SAUc board when the

RUN indicator is blinking (1s on and 1s off).

If ... Then ...

Operating Status is ActiveNormal

Go to Step 5.3.

Other execution results aredisplayed

Go to Step 5.2.

2. Check whether the alarms related board faults are displayed on the LMT.

If ... Then ...

Alarms related to board faults arereported

a. Analyze the alarms according to the alarminformation, and then clear the alarms.

b. Go to Step 5.1.

Alarms related to board faults arenot displayed

Go to Step 5.3.

3. Run the DSP SAUMODULE command to query the status of the SAU services.

If ... Then ...

Status is Startup Type The replacing is complete.

Status is Stopped Restart the abnormal process. If the fault persists,contact the Huawei technical support engineers.

Status is Abnormal Contact Huawei technical support engineers.

----End

Follow-up Procedure1. Record the name of the site, slot, and board where the faulty board is located and the version

of the board.2. Check whether there is obvious physical damage to the board. For example, check whether

there are any deformed mechanical parts, burned components, distorted connectors, andbent or broken-off pins.

3. Record the fault cause, fault symptom, alarm name, status of indicators on the panel of theboard, and details of the procedures for locating and processing the faults on site.

4. Put the board into the ESD bag and then put the bag together with the onsite fault recordinto the board box. Keep the box properly.



192

5. Contact the local Huawei office to handle the faulty board. .

8.24 Replacing an SCUa/SCUb BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty SCUa/SCUb board. The SCUa/SCUb board ishot-swappable. It takes about four minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, ESD box or

bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.l A new SCUa/SCUb board is ready.l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context




CAUTIONl Replacing the standby SCUa/SCUb board decreases the internal switching capacity and has

no effect on the services in the system.l When no standby board is in position, replacing the SCUa/SCUb board in the MPS resets all

the other boards in the MPS and disrupts all the ongoing services in the subrack.l When no standby board is in position, replacing the SCUa/SCUb board in the EPS/TCS resets

all the other boards in the EPS/TCS and disrupts all the ongoing services in the subrack. Inaddition, the communication between the EPS/TCS and the MPS is disrupted.

Procedure

Step 1 Display the subrack that houses the SCUa/SCUb board in the Device Panel on the LMT. Checkthe configuration of the SCUa/SCUb board.



193

If... Then...

Slots 6 and 7 are configured with the SCUa/SCUb boards, Go to Step 2.

Slot 6 or 7 is configured with the SCUa/SCUb board, Go to Step 3.


If... Then...

CPU status is Active normal, 1. Run SWP BRD to switch the board over tostandby.


A forced active/standby switchover will affect the runningof the system. Therefore, run this command when thetraffic is light, for instance, at midnight.


Step 3 Check whether the labels on the cables connected to the SCUa/SCUb are legible. If the labelsare illegible, re-label the cables to avoid faulty connections after replacing the board.






If... Then...

Only one SCUa/SCUb board is configured and the CPU status is Activenormal,

Go to Step 10.

Two SCUa/SCUb boards are configured and the CPU status is Standbynormal,

Go to Step 10.





194

If... Then...



2. Go to Step 8.


Go to Step 10.


If... Then...


Go to Step 11.




NOTE



----End

Follow-up Procedure









195

8.25 Replacing a TNUa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty TNUa board. The TNUa board is hot-swappable.It takes about four minutes to replace the board.


bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.l A new TNUa board is ready.l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context




CAUTIONl Replacing the standby TNUa board decreases the internal switching capacity and has no

impact on the ongoing services.l When no standby board is in position, replacing the TNUa board in the MPS resets all the

other boards in the MPS and disrupts all the ongoing services in the subrack.l When no standby board is in position, replacing the TNUa board in the EPS/TCS resets all

the other boards in the EPS/TCS and disrupts all the ongoing services in the subrack. Inaddition, the communication between the EPS/TCS and the MPS is disrupted.

Procedure

Step 1 Display the subrack that houses the TNUa board in the Device Panel on the LMT. Check theconfiguration of the TNUa board.

If... Then...

Slots 4 and 5 are configured with the TNUa boards, Go to Step 2.



196

If... Then...

Slot 4 or 5 is configured with the TNUa board, Go to Step 3.


If... Then...





Step 3 Check whether the labels on the cables connected to the TNUa board are legible. If the labelsare illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper connection after the board isreplaced.






If... Then...

Only one TNUa board is configured, and the CPU status is Activenormal,

Go to Step 10.

Two SCUa boards are configured and the CPU status is Standbynormal,

Go to Step 10.





197

If... Then...



2. Go to Step 8.


Go to Step 10.


If... Then...


Go to Step 11.




NOTE



----End

Follow-up Procedure









198

8.26 Replacing a UOIa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty UOIa board. The UOIa board is hot swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.


bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.

l A new UOIa board is ready.


Context




CAUTIONl Replacing the standby UOIa board has no adverse effect on the system. When no standby

UOIa board is in position, replacing the board disrupts services carried on this board.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the UOIa board, theongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when youreplace the UOIa board.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the UOIa board to be replaced.

If... Then...





199

NOTE



If... Then...

CPU status is Active normal, 1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board overto standby status.


Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance, atmidnight.


Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the optical ports on the UOIaboard to be replaced.

If... Then...


The optical port is active, 1. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch the active portover to standby status. Set MSP Control Command to MS(Manual Switchover from working link to protectionlink).

2. Go to Step 4.

Step 4 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to theUOIa board are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoidimproper connection after the board is replaced.





Step 9 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and reserve them for later use. Then, connectthe optical cable by referring to the labels.





200

If... Then...




If... Then...



2. Go to Step 11.


Go to Step 13.


If... Then...


Go to Step 14.




NOTE



----End

Follow-up ProcedureRecord the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obviousphysical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packinga board, pay attention to the following points:l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.



201





8.27 Replacing a UOIc BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty UOIc board. The UOIc board is hot-swappable.It takes about five minutes to replace the board.


bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.

l A new UOIc board is ready.


Context




CAUTIONl Replacing the standby UOIc board has no adverse effect on the system. Replacing the UOIc

board that works independently, however, disrupts services carried on the board.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the UOIc board, theongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are disrupted when youreplace the UOIc board.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the UOIc board to be replaced.



202

If... Then...



NOTE



If... Then...





Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the optical ports on the UOIcboard to be replaced.

If... Then...


The optical port is active, 1. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch the active portto standby status. Set MSP Control Command to MS(Manual Switchover from working link to protectionlink).

2. Go to Step 4.

Step 4 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to theUOIc board are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoidimproper connection after the board is replaced.


Step 6 Remove the optical cable and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them withdustfree cotton cloth or fiber cleaner.





203


Step 9 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and reserve them for later use. Then, connectthe optical cable by referring to the labels.



If... Then...




If... Then...



2. Go to Step 11.


Go to Step 13.


If... Then...


Go to Step 14.




3. Go to Step 11.

NOTE




204


----End



8.28 Replacing an XPUa/SPUa BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty XPUa/SPUa board. The XPUa/SPUa board is hot-swappable. It takes about six minutes to replace and load a board.


bag, and dustfree cotton cloth.l A new XPUa/SPUa board is ready.l The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context






205

CAUTIONl Replacing the standby main control XPUa/SPUa board has no adverse impact on the services

in the system. Replacing the main control XPUa/SPUa board that works independently,however, disrupts services carried in the subrack.

l Replacing the standby non main control XPUa/SPUa board has no adverse impact on theservices in the system. Replacing the non main control XPUa/SPUa board that worksindependently, however, disrupts services carried in the board.

Procedure

Step 1 Display the subrack that houses the XPUa/SPUa board in the Device Panel on the LMT. Checkthe configuration of the XPUa/SPUa board.

If... Then...

The XPUa/SPUa board to be replaced works in the active/standby mode, Go to Step 2.

The XPUa/SPUa board to be replaced does not work in the active/standbymode,

Go to Step 3.

NOTE


Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the XPUa/SPUa board to be replaced.

If... Then...

CPU status is Active normal, 1. Run SWP BRD to switch the board over to standby.2. Go to Step 3.CAUTION

Run this command when the traffic is light, for instance, atmidnight.


Step 3 Remove the XPUa/SPUa board to be replaced by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board.

Step 4 Insert the new XPUa/SPUa board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.





206

If... Then...

The XPUa/SPUa board to be replaced does not work in the active/standbymode, CPU status is Active normal,

Go to Step 7.

The XPUa/SPUa board to be replaced works in the active/standby mode,CPU status is Standby normal,

Go to Step 7.



If... Then...



2. Go to Step 5.


Go to Step 7.


If... Then...


Go to Step 8.




NOTE



----End

Follow-up ProcedureRecord the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obviousphysical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,



207

fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packinga board, pay attention to the following points:






8.29 Replacing an XPUb/SPUb BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty XPUb/SPUb board. The XPUb/SPUb board ishot-swappable. It takes about six minutes to replace and load a board.


bag, and dustfree cotton cloth.

l A new XPUb/SPUb board is ready.


Context




CAUTIONl Replacing the standby main control XPUb/SPUb board has no adverse impact on the system.

Replacing the main control XPUb/SPUb board that works independently, however, disruptsservices carried in the subrack.

l Replacing the standby non-main control XPUb/SPUb board has no adverse impact on thesystem. Replacing the non-main control XPUb/SPUb board that works independently,however, disrupts services carried on the board.



208

Procedure

Step 1 Display the subrack that houses the XPUb/SPUb board in the Device Panel on the LMT. Checkthe configuration of the XPUb/SPUb board.

If... Then...

The XPUb/SPUb board to be replaced works in active/standby mode, Go to Step 2.

The XPUb/SPUb board to be replaced does not work in active/standbymode,

Go to Step 3.

NOTE


Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the XPUb/SPUb board to be replaced.

If... Then...





Step 3 Remove the XPUb/SPUb board to be replaced by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board.

Step 4 Install the new XPUb/SPUb board into the subrack by referring to 8.2.2 Inserting a Board.The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN LED blinksevery other 0.125s.


If... Then...

The XPUb/SPUb board to be replaced does not work in active/standbymode, CPU status is Active normal,

Go to Step 7.

The XPUb/SPUb board to be replaced works in active/standby mode, CPUstatus is Standby normal,

Go to Step 7.




209


If... Then...



2. Go to Step 5.


Go to Step 7.


If... Then...


Go to Step 8.




3. Go to Step 5.

NOTE



----End





210

8.30 Replacing a WOPB BoardThis section describes how to replace a faulty WOPB board. The WOPB board is hot-swappable.It takes about ten minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box or

bag.l A new WOPB board is ready according to field requirements.l The LMT is started, and the connection between the LMT PC and the server is normal.

Context


connector of the cabinet before replacing the board. If the ESD wrist strap is unavailable orif there is no ESD connector for the ESD wrist strap, wear ESD gloves.

l During the replacement of the WOPB board, the overvoltage protection function isunavailable.

Procedure

Step 1 Remove the captive screw on the WOPB board with a Phillips screwdriver, as shown in Figure8-21.

Figure 8-21 Replacing a WOPB board

Screw

WOPB

Handle



211

Step 2 Hold the handle of the WOPB board and remove the board from the power distribution box.Then, put the board into an ESD box or bag.

CAUTIONThe WOPB board is twice as long as other boards. To avoid damaging the WOPB board duringthe replacement, move the board only after you have completely removed the board from thecabinet.

Step 3 Insert the new WOPB board along the guide rails.

Step 4 Secure the captive screw on the WOPB board.

Step 5 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT. If such an alarm is reported, identifyand rectify the fault according to the alarm information.

----End

Follow-up Procedure







8.31 Replacing a SubrackThis section describes how to replace a faulty BSC6900 subrack with a new BSC6900 subrack.After 60 minutes from cutting off the power supply of a faulty subrack, a new subrack will startworking properly.

Prerequisitesl Tools required for adding subracks are available. The tools include an ESD wrist strap, a

socket wrench, a Phillips screwdriver, a flat-head screwdriver, diagonal pliers, a dustfreecloth, and a fiber cleaner.

l Standby subracks are ready.



212

Context


CAUTIONl Replacing the MPS disrupts all the services carried in the BSC6900.

l Replacing the EPS/TCS disrupts all the services carried in this subrack.

l You should quickly replace a subrack with caution when the traffic is light, for instance, atmidnight.

l For safety reason, three persons are required to replace a subrack due to the heavy weight.

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether the labels on the cables are legible. If the labels are illegible, relabel the cablesto avoid incorrect connections after replacing the subrack.

Step 2 Record the installation positions of the boards in the subrack.

Step 3 Check the types of subracks to be replaced. Perform the following operations accordingly:

If... Then...

EPS/TCS Turn off the power switch for the subrack to be replaced.

MPS 1. Raise the ejector levers of the OMUa/OMUc board, as shown in part B ofRemoving the OMUa/OMUc board. Repeat this step if two OMUa boardsare in the subrack.

2. Turn off the power switch for the subrack to be replaced after the OFFLINELED on the OMUa/OMUc board is steady on.

NOTE

Assign switches for BSC6900 cabinets by referring to labels on the front panel of the power distributionbox. For details, see 5.2 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power PDB, and 5.1 Distributionof Power Switches on the Common Power Distribution Box.

Step 4 Disconnect the cables connected to the subrack.

Step 5 Remove the boards from the subrack in order by referring to 8.2.1 Removing a Board. Then,put them in the ESD boxes or bags.



213

Step 6 Remove the eight captive screws fixing the subrack on the cabinet from the front of the cabinetby a Phillips screwdriver and reserve them for future use. Four captive screws are at the left sideand the other are at the right side.

Step 7 One person pushes the subrack along the guide rails from the back of the cabinet. The other twopersons hold the subrack by the mounting ears with hands supporting the base of the subrackand remove the subrack from the cabinet.

Step 8 Two people hold the mounting ears and support the base of the subrack. Slide the subrack alongthe guiding rail into the cabinet, and then fasten the screws to fix the subrack.

Step 9 Set the DIP switches of the new subrack by referring to the DIP switch setting of the subrack tobe replaced. For details about BSC6900 Checking and Setting DIP Switches on Subracks, seeDIP Switch on the Subrack.

Step 10 Install the power cables for the new subrack:

1. Take off the cover of the power cable connection box and unscrew the power ports, asshown in Figure 8-22.

Figure 8-22 Power cable connection box

2. Connect the power cables to the power ports in the subrack, as shown in Figure 8-23.



214

Figure 8-23 Connecting the power cable to the power port

3. Install the cover of the power cable connection box, as shown Figure 8-24.

Figure 8-24 Installing the cover of the power cable connection box

Step 11 Insert the boards into the subrack by referring to the records in Step 2 and 8.2.2 Inserting aBoard.



215

Step 12 Install an inter-SCUa or inter-SCUb cable:

l If the new subrack is to be configured with SCUa boards, install the inter-SCUa cablesbetween different subracks according to instructions in Installing the Inter-SCUa CablesBetween Different Subracks.

l If the new subrack is to be configured with SCUb boards, install inter-SCUb SFP+ high-speed cables between different subracks according to instructions in Installing the Inter-SCUb SFP+ High-Speed Cables Between Different Subracks.

Step 13 Install the Ethernet cables and fiber optics for connecting the interface boards.

Step 14 Turn on the power switch on the new subrack.

Step 15 Carry out load commissioning and service commissioning.For detailed procedures for commissioning, see the BSC6900 GU Commissioning Guide.

Step 16 After replacing a BSC6900 subrack, check whether alarms related to faults in subracks arecleared, such as a Cell Setup Failure alarm. If the alarms are not cleared, clear them by referringto the alarm online help on the LMT. If the alarms persist, contact Huawei for technical support.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureContact the local Huawei office to handle the faulty subrack.

8.32 Replacing the Independent Fan SubrackWhen an independent fan subrack in the BSC6900 is faulty, the independent fan subrack mustbe replaced. It takes about 15 minutes to replace an independent fan subrack.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head

screwdriver, diagonal pliers, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.

l A new independent fan subrack is ready.

Context


Procedure

Step 1 View the label for each port at the rear of the fan subrack, as shown in Figure 8-25. If a label isnot legible, attach a new label to avoid wrong connection after replacing the fan subrack.



216

Figure 8-25 Rear view of the fan subrack

1 Monitor 1 port for the connection to the powerdistribution box

2 Power input port 3 Monitor 2 port (reserved)

4 Monitor 0 port for the connection to the BSC6900subrack

5 Monitor 3 port (reserved)

Step 2 Turn off the power switch that control the independent fan subrack to be replaced.

NOTE

For distribution of the BSC6900 power switches, see the labels on the front panel of the power distributionbox. For details, see 5.2 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power PDB.

Step 3 Remove the four screws that fix the independent fan subrack from the front of the cabinet andreserve them for future use.

Step 4 Hold the mounting ears and support the bottom of the fan subrack, and then pull the fan subrackfor a short distance so that the cables connected to the independent fan subrack can be removed.

Step 5 Remove the cables connected to the independent fan subrack by referring to 9 Replacing theCables.

Step 6 Hold the mounting ears and support the bottom of the fan subrack, and then remove theindependent fan subrack from the cabinet.

Step 7 Connect monitoring signal cables and PGND cable to the new independent fan subrack.

Step 8 Hold the mounting ears and support the bottom of the new independent fan subrack, and thenpush the independent fan subrack slowly into the cabinet along the guide rails.

CAUTIONl Do not push the independent fan subrack completely into the cabinet, that is, certain space

should be reserved for installing cables.l Pay attention to the mounting bar and guide rails when installing cables.

Step 9 Connect the monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box and power cables to the newindependent fan subrack.

Step 10 Connect the monitoring signal cable to the monitor 0 port on the new independent fan subrack.

Step 11 Connect the PGND cable to the mounting bar.

Step 12 Push the independent fan subrack completely into the subrack.



217

Step 13 Fix the screws on the panel of the independent fan subrack.

Step 14 Turn on the power switch that control the independent fan subrack on the power distributionbox.

Step 15 Perform service commissioning.For detailed procedures, see the BSC6900 GU Commissioning Guide.

Step 16 After replacing the independent fan subrack in the BSC6900 cabinet, check whether the alarmsrelated to the independent fan subrack are cleared. If these alarms persist, clear them by referringto the alarm online help on the LMT. If these alarms still persist, contact Huawei for technicalsupport.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureContact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced independent fan subrack.

8.33 Replacing the Power Distribution BoxThis section describes how to replace a faulty power distribution box. It takes about 25 minutesto replace a power distribution box.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. They are ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, cable ties, diagonal

pliers, insulation tapes, and sticky label papers.l The new power distribution box is configured according to actual requirements on site.

Context




CAUTIONl Replacing the power distribution box in the EPR/TCR disrupts all the services carried by the

EPR/TCR.l Replacing the power distribution box in the MPR disrupts all the services carried by the entire

BSC6900.



218

There are two types of power distribution boxes for the BSC6900, and they are different in termsof the rear panel.

Figure 8-26 shows the rear panel of the common power distribution box.

Figure 8-26 Rear panel of the common power distribution box

1 Power input terminals 2 Power output terminals 3 COM3: Port connecting the power distribution box and aservice subrack

The installation positions for the -48 V power cable and RTN power cable are labeled -48V andRTN on the power input terminal block and power output terminal block.

Figure 8-27 shows the rear panel of the high-power distribution box.

Figure 8-27 Rear panel of the high-power distribution box

1 Power input terminals 2 Power output terminals3 Port connecting the power distribution box and a service subrack 4 2-hole ground screw



219

l On the power input terminal, the installation positions for the -48 V power cables are labeled3(-), 2(-), and 1(-), and the installation positions for the RTN power cables are labeled 3(+), 2(+), and 1(+).

l The installation positions for the -48 V power cables and RTN power cables are labeledNEG(-) and RTN(+) on the power output terminal of the power distribution box.

Procedurel Replace a common power distribution box.

1. Record the state of each power switch on the power distribution box. Set all theswitches to OFF.

2. Set the power switches that control the BSC power supply on the DC PDF to OFF.

CAUTIONAfter powering off the cabinet, wait for five minutes, and then replace the powerdistribution box.

3. Remove the cables from the common power distribution box. Figure 8-26 shows thecables connected to the panel of the common power distribution box.– Check the engineering labels on the power input cables, as shown in 1 of Figure

8-26. If the label is not legible, attach a temporary label and fill in the position ofthe cable. Then, remove the power cables.

– Check the engineering labels on the power output cables, as shown in 2 of Figure8-26. If the label is not legible, attach a temporary label and fill in the position ofthe cable. Then, remove the power cables.

– Remove the signal monitoring cable that is connected to the port shown in 3 ofFigure 8-26.

– Remove the PGND cable that is connected to the busbar of the cabinet from thepower distribution box.

4. Remove the four screws from the front hanger of the power distribution box. Keepthe screws properly for future use.

5. Remove the screws on the front panel of the power distribution box by using the M3Phillips screwdriver.

6. Hold the handle of the power distribution box and take it out of the cabinet.7. Insert the new box into the cabinet.8. Fasten the four screws to the front hanger of the power distribution box. Fasten the

screws to the front panel of the power distribution box.9. Connect the cables to the power distribution box.

– Connect the PGND cable to the power distribution box.– Connect the power input cable by referring to the engineering label or temporary

label. Then, attach a new engineering label to the cable.– Connect the power output cable by referring to the engineering label or temporary

label. Then, attach a new engineering label to the cable.– Connect the signal monitoring cable to the power distribution box.

10. Ensure that all the power cables are correctly connected.



220

11. Set the power switch that controls the power supply of the power distribution box onthe PDF to ON.

12. Set the switches on the power distribution box to ON by referring to the records inStep 1.

13. After replacing the power distribution box, check the items in Table 8-24.

Table 8-24 Checklist for the new power distribution box

Item Result Action

LEDs on the panelshow the normal statusof the powerdistribution box. Fordetails about the LEDs,refer to LEDs on theMDMC Panel.

Yes Check the next item.

No 1. Check whether the powerinput cables are correctlyconnected. If the powerinput cables are incorrectlyconnected, reconnect thecables.

2. If faults persist, contactHuawei for technicalsupport.

Alarms related to thepower distribution boxfailure are cleared.


No 1. Clear the alarms byreferring to the alarmonline help on the LMT.

2. If the alarms persist,contact Huawei fortechnical support.

The power distributionbox supplies power toall the components inthe cabinet.

Yes End the check.

No 1. Check whether the poweroutput cables are correctlyconnected. If the poweroutput cables areincorrectly connected, turnoff all the power switcheson the power distributionbox and the powerswitches that controlpower supply of thecabinet on the PDF. Thenreconnect the cables.




221

NOTE

After powering on the cabinet, check the power supply to the internal components and handleproblems accordingly.

l Replace a high-power distribution box.1. Record the state of each power switch on the power distribution box. Set all the power

switches to OFF.2. Set the power switches that control the BSC power supply on the DC PDF to OFF.

CAUTIONAfter powering off the cabinet, wait for five minutes, and then replace the powerdistribution box.

3. Loosen the screws on the rear transparent plastic filler panel of the power distributionbox by using the M3 Phillips screwdriver. Then, remove the plastic filler panel.

4. Remove the cables from the power distribution box. Figure 8-27 shows the cablesconnected to the panel of the high-power distribution box.

– Check the engineering labels on the power input cables, as shown in 1 of Figure8-27. If the label is not legible, attach a temporary label and fill in the position ofthe cable. Then, remove the power cables.

– Check the engineering labels on the power output cables, as shown in 2 of Figure8-27. If the label is not legible, attach a temporary label and fill in the position ofthe cable. Then, remove the power cables.

– Remove the signal monitoring cable that is connected to the port shown in 3 ofFigure 8-27.

– Remove the PGND cable that is connected to the busbar of the cabinet from thepower distribution box.

5. Remove the four screws from the hanger of the power distribution box. Keep thescrews properly for future use.

6. Remove the screws on the front panel of the power distribution box by using the M3Phillips screwdriver. Then, remove the MCBs and filler panels from the powerdistribution box. Keep the components for future use.

7. Hold the handle of the power distribution box and take it out of the cabinet.8. Loosen the six screws on the front plastic panel of the new power distribution box by

using the M3 Phillips screwdriver. Then, remove the plastic panel.9. Install the MCBs in the new power distribution box. Note the installation positions.10. Install the filler panels at the positions where MCBs are not installed in the new power

distribution box.11. Install the plastic panel of the new power distribution box, install the power

distribution box on the top of the cabinet, and then fasten the four screws on the fronthanger of the power distribution box.

12. Connect the cables to the power distribution box.

– Connect the PGND cable to the power distribution box.

– Connect the power input cable by referring to the engineering label or temporarylabel. Then, attach a new engineering label to the cable.



222

– Connect the power output cable by referring to the engineering label or temporarylabel. Then, attach a new engineering label to the cable.

– Connect the signal monitoring cable to the power distribution box.13. Ensure that all the power cables are correctly connected.14. Set the power switch that controls the power supply of the power distribution box on

the PDF to ON15. Set the power switches on the power distribution box to ON by referring to the records

in Step 1.16. Install the transparent plastic filler panel at the rear of the power distribution box.17. After replacing the power distribution box, check the items in Table 8-25.

Table 8-25 Checklist for the new power distribution box

Item Result Action

LEDs on the panelshow the normal statusof the powerdistribution box. Fordetails about the LEDs,refer to LEDs on thePAMU Board.


No 1. Check whether the powerinput cables are correctlyconnected. If the powerinput cables are incorrectlyconnected, reconnect thecables.


Alarms related to thepower distribution boxfailure are cleared.




The power distributionbox supplies power toall the components inthe cabinet.

Yes End the check.



223

Item Result Action

No 1. Check whether the poweroutput cables are correctlyconnected. If the poweroutput cables areincorrectly connected, turnoff all the power switcheson the power distributionbox and the powerswitches that controlpower supply of thecabinet on the PDF. Thenreconnect the cables.

2. If the faults persist, contactHuawei for technicalsupport.

NOTE

After powering on the cabinet, check the power supply to the internal components and handleproblems accordingly.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureContact the local Huawei office to handle the faulty power distribution box.

8.34 Replacing the Fan BoxWhen a fan box in the service subrack or in the independent fan subrack is faulty, the fan boxmust be replaced. You should finish the replacement of the fan box in less than one minute.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and flat-head

screwdriver.l The backup fan box is clean.

Context




224

CAUTIONReplacing the fan box severely affects the heat dissipation; therefore, you are advised to replacethe fan box within one minute. Otherwise, the boards will be damaged due to high temperature.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the DIP switch on the PFCU according to the installation position and actual configurationof the fan box.l If the fan box is located in the service subrack and the PFCU board is configured, set the DIP

switch on the PFCU board (as shown in Figure 8-28) in the new fan box according to Table8-26.

Figure 8-28 DIP switch on the PFCU

Table 8-26 Setting of the DIP switch on the PFCU

DIP Switch DIP Bit Switch Status Description

SW1 1 (the least significantbit)

OFF 1

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the most significantbit)

ON 0

l If the fan box is located in the independent fan subrack and the PFCU board is configured,

set the DIP switch on the PFCU board (as shown in Figure 8-29) in the new fan box accordingto Table 8-27.

Figure 8-29 DIP switch on the PFCU



225

Table 8-27 Setting of the DIP switch on the PFCU

DIP Switch DIP Bit Switch Status Description


ON 0

2 ON 0

3 OFF 1


ON 0

Step 2 Loosen the captive screws from the panel of the fan box.

Step 3 Remove the fan box along the guide rails, as shown in Figure 8-30. When the fan box is almostout of the cabinet, hold the bottom of the fan box with one hand and the handle with the otheruntil the fan box is removed from the cabinet.

CAUTIONWhen replacing the fan box, do not put your hand inside the fan box. Otherwise, the revolvingblade will injure your fingers.

Figure 8-30 Removing the fan box

1 Handle 2 Screw 3 LED



226

Step 4 Reserve the replaced fan box for later handling.

Step 5 Insert the fan box into the subrack along the guide rails by holding the bottom of the fan boxwith one hand and the handle with the other hand. Then, push the fan box by holding two handleson the fan box along the guide rails until the fan starts to work.

Step 6 Secure the captive screws on the panel.

Step 7 After replacing the fan box, check the items in Table 8-28.

Table 8-28 Checklist for replacing the fan box

Item Result Action

Whether the LEDs on the panelshow that the fan box is in normalstate. For details on the LEDs,refer to the following section:Fan Box (Configured with thePFCU Board) if PFCU isconfigured.


No 1. Pull out the fan boxslightly. Then, adjustthe fan box position andpush the fan box back inposition.

2. If the alarm box is stillabnormal, contactHuawei CustomerService Center.

Whether the alarms caused bythe faulty fan box are cleared.

Yes End the check.


2. If the alarms persist,contact HuaweiCustomer ServiceCenter.

Step 8 Clean the replaced fan box, and then put it in an ESD box or bag.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureContact the local Huawei office to handle the replaced fan box.

8.35 Replacing the Pluggable Optical ModuleThis section describes how to replace a pluggable optical module when the module is faulty.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, the ESD box or bag, and the diagonal

pliers.l A new optical module is ready.



227

Context


In short-distance transmission, the multi-mode optical module is used with the multi-modefibers. The effective transmission distance is 2 km. In long-distance transmission, the single-mode optical module is used with the single-mode fibers. The effective transmission distancecan be 15 km, 40 km, or 80 km. Generally, the single-mode optical module with the effectivetransmission distance of 15 km is used. The BSC6900 and its peer equipment must use the sametype of the optical module, which mainly features the mode and wavelength.

Table 8-29 lists the related parameters of the optical modules.

Table 8-29 Parameters of optical modules

OpticalModuleType

ProtocolType

OpticalConnector Type

OperatingWavelength

Rate

TransmissionDistance

Max./Min.OutputOpticalPower

SaturationOpticalPower

ReceiverSensitivity

Multi-modeopticalmodule

STM–1

LC/PC 1310nm

155Mbit/s

2 km -14/-19 dBm -14dBm

-30dBm

Single-modeopticalmodule

STM–1

LC/PC 1310nm

155Mbit/s

15 km -8/-15 dBm -8 dBm -31dBm


GE LC/PC 850nm

1.25Gbit/s

0.5 km -2.5/-9.5 dBm 0 dBm -17dBm


GE LC/PC 1310nm

1.25Gbit/s

10 km -3/-9 dBm -3 dBm -20dBm



228

OpticalModuleType

ProtocolType

OpticalConnector Type

OperatingWavelength

Rate

TransmissionDistance

Max./Min.OutputOpticalPower

SaturationOpticalPower

ReceiverSensitivity


10GE

LC/PC 850nm

10.3125Gbit/s

0.3 km -1/-7.3 dBm -1 dBm -11.1dBm


10GE

LC/PC 1310nm

10.3125Gbit/s

10 km 0.5/-8.2 dBm 0.5dBm

-12.6dBm

NOTE

l Replacing the hot-swappable optical module on the standby optical interface board does not have anegative effect on the system.

l If there is no standby board in position, replacing the hot-swappable optical module on the active opticalinterface board disrupts all the services carried on the board.

ProcedureStep 1 Remove the optical cable from the optical port.

Step 2 After removing the optical cable, use a protective cap to cover the optical connector.

Step 3 Unlock the bayonet, as shown in part 1 of Figure 8-31. Remove the optical module, as shownin part 2 of Figure 8-31.

Figure 8-31 Replacing an optical module



229

Step 4 Put the removed optical module into an ESD bag.

Step 5 Insert the new optical module into the socket on the optical interface board. Ensure that thebayonet lock is secure.

Step 6 Connect the optical cable to the optical port. Ensure that the TX and RX ends of the optical cableare connected correctly. You can hear a click sound when the optical cable is securely connected.

Step 7 Check whether the alarm related to the optical module is cleared.

NOTE

An alarm is generated when the optical module is removed. The alarm is cleared when the optical moduleis reinstalled.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureContact the local Huawei office to handle the replaced optical module.

8.36 Replacing an Optical Splitter/CombinerThis section describes how to replace an optical splitter/combiner. The BSC6900 opticalsplitters/combiners are LC/LC-LC single-mode optical splitter/combiner and LC/LC-LC multi-mode optical splitter/combiner. It takes about five minutes to replace an optical splitter/combiner.

Prerequisitesl The following tools are ready: the ESD wrist strap, dustfree cotton cloth, fiber cleaner, and

diagonal pliers.l The following materials are ready: cable ties and permanent labels.l A new optical splitter/combiner is ready.l The number and type of optical splitters/combiners to be replaced are clear.

Context




230

CAUTIONl When replacing the optical splitter/combiner, do not look into the optical port without eye

protection.l Replacing an optical splitter/combiner disrupts ongoing services on the corresponding

interface boards. Therefore, replace it in low traffic hours, for example, at midnight.

Procedure

Step 1 Attach temporary labels to the new optical splitter/combiner for easy identification. It isrecommended that content of the temporary labels be identical with the labels on the old opticalsplitter/combiner.

Step 2 Put the new optical splitter/combiner aside the old optical splitter/combiner.

Step 3 Disconnect the optical fiber by pressing the tab on the optical connector. Then, remove the opticalsplitter/combiner to be replaced.

Step 4 Install the new optical splitter/combiner by referring to Installing the Optical Splitter/Combiner.

CAUTIONThe TX end and RX end of the new optical splitter/combiner must be correctly connected.Otherwise, optical signals cannot be received or transmitted.

Step 5 Replace the temporary labels on the new optical splitter/combiner with the engineering labels.The content of the engineering labels must be identical with that of the temporary labels. Fordetails, see Attaching an Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.

Step 6 Bind the optical splitters/combiners.

Step 7 Check the items listed in Table 8-30.

Table 8-30 Checklist for monitoring optical splitter/combiner replacement

Item Result Action

Connection of theoptical fiber iscorrect.


No Remove the optical fiber and reconnect it.

Optical connectorsare properly insertedinto the relatedports.


No Secure the optical connectors.

Alarms related to thetransmission cableare cleared.

Yes No further action is required.

NoClear the alarms by referring to the alarm onlinehelp on the LMT. If the alarms persist, contactHuawei for technical support.



231

----End

Follow-up ProcedureDispose of the replaced optical splitter/combiner to prevent environmental pollution.

8.37 Replacing the KVMThis section describes how to replace a faulty KVM. It takes about 10 minutes to replace a KVM.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and flat-head

screwdriver.l The new KVM is configured according to actual requirements on site.

Context


connector of the cabinet before replacing a KVM. Wear a pair of ESD gloves instead if thereis no ESD wrist strap or there is no ESD connector for the ESD wrist strap.

l When replacing the KVM, one cannot operate the GBAM through the GUI.

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether the labels on the cables connected to the KVM are legible. If the labels are notlegible, attach new labels to the cables to avoid improper connection after the KVM is replaced.

Step 2 Turn off the power switch on the rear panel of the KVM.

Step 3 Turn off the power switch that controls power supply to the KVM. Figure 8-32 shows the powerswitches on the power distribution box in the MPR.



232

Figure 8-32 Distribution of the power switches in the MPR

Step 4 Remove the cables that are connected to the KVM to be replaced.

Step 5 Remove the rear hangers from the KVM.

Step 6 Remove the screws that fix the front hangers of the KVM to the rack. Then, remove the KVMfrom the cabinet along the guide rails.

Step 7 Place the new KVM in the original position. Then, secure the screws.

Step 8 Install the rear hangers on the new KVM, and then secure the screws that fix the rear hangers tothe rack.

Step 9 Connect the cables to the new KVM.

Step 10 Turn on the power switch that controls power supply to the KVM.

Figure 8-32 shows the power switches on the power distribution box in the MPR.

Step 11 Turn on the power switch on the rear panel of the KVM.

Step 12 Check whether the KVM works normally. If the KVM does not work normally, clear the alarmsby referring to the alarm online help on the LMT. If the alarms persist, contact Huawei fortechnical support.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureContact the local Huawei office to handle the faulty KVM.



233

8.38 Replacing the LAN SwitchThis section describes how to replace a faulty LAN switch. It takes about 10 minutes to replacea LAN switch.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and flat-head

screwdriver.l The new LAN switch is configured according to actual requirements on site.

Context


connector of the cabinet before replacing a LAN switch. Wear a pair of ESD gloves insteadif there is no ESD wrist strap or there is no ESD connector for the ESD wrist strap.

l Replacing the LAN switch disrupts the communication between the LMT/M2000 and theGBAM.

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether the labels on the Ethernet cables connected to the LAN switch are legible. If thelabels are not legible, attach new labels to the cables to avoid improper connection after the LANswitch is replaced.

Step 2 Turn off power switch SW3 that controls the power supply to the LAN switch to be replaced.For details on power switches on the power distribution box, see 5.1 Distribution of PowerSwitches on the Common Power Distribution Box.

Step 3 Remove the PGND cable and Ethernet cables that are connected to the LAN switch to bereplaced.

Step 4 Remove the screws fixing the LAN switch to the rack.

Step 5 Remove the LAN switch from the cabinet along the guide rails. Remove the power cable that isconnected to the rear of the LAN switch.

Step 6 Connect the power cable to the rear of the new LAN switch.

Step 7 Place the new LAN switch in the original position. Then, secure the screws.

Step 8 Connect the PGND cable and Ethernet cables to the LAN switch.

Step 9 Turn on power switch that controls the power supply to the LAN switch. For details on powerswitches on the power distribution box, see 5.1 Distribution of Power Switches on theCommon Power Distribution Box.

Step 10 Check the items in Table 8-31.



234

Table 8-31 Checklist for LAN switch replacement

Item Result Action

Whether the LEDs on the panel of the LANswitch show that the LAN switch is innormal state. For details on the LEDs, seeLAN Switch.


No Rectify the fault byreferring to the usermanual of the LANswitch.

Whether the alarms caused by the faultyLAN switch are cleared.


No 1. Clear the alarms byreferring to thealarm online helpon the LMT.

2. If the alarmspersist, contactHuawei fortechnical support.

Whether the communication between theLAN switch and other computers on thesame network segment is normal Whetherthe communication between the LANswitch and other computers on the samenetwork segment is normal by running thePing command.

Yes End the check.

No Check whether thesetting of the LANswitch is correct.l If the setting of the

LAN switch isincorrect, modifythe setting.

l If the setting of theLAN switch iscorrect, check theconnection of theEthernet cables.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureContact the local Huawei office to handle the faulty LAN switch.

8.39 Replacing the GBAMThis section describes how to replace a faulty GBAM. It takes about 40 minutes to replace aGBAM. There are three models of GBAM, namely, IBM X3650T, C5210, and HP CC3310.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head

screwdriver, and ESD boxes or bags.



235

l A new GBAM is ready.

CAUTIONl When configuring the new GBAM or OMU board, ensure that the following parameter

settings are consistent with those of the GBAM to be replaced: server name or computername, OS administrator password, admin password, and IP address.

l If you change the IP address of the GBAM, you need to reset the alarm box manually.

Context




CAUTIONl Replacing the GBAM disrupts the communication between the GBAM and the host boards.l Replacing the GBAM disrupts the communication between the LMT/M2000 and the

BSC6900. In this case, you cannot maintain the BSC6900 or collect the alarm information.The BSC6900 host boards, however, work normally during the replacement of the GBAM.

Procedurel Replace the GBAM with a new GBAM.

1. Log in to the GBAM as user root, and then run the Linux OS command /etc/rc.d/omud stop to stop all applications on the GBAM to be replaced.

2. Run the Linux OS command poweroff to shut down the GBAM to be replaced.3. Turn off SW3 and SW6 on the power distribution box that control the power supply

to the GBAM to be replaced. Figure 8-33 shows the labels for the power switches onthe front panel of the power distribution box.



236

Figure 8-33 Front panel of the power distribution box

1 Panel of the MDMC 2 RUN LED 3 ALM LED 4 Mute switch5 Labels of power switches 6 Power switches 7 Panel of the WOPB board

4. Check whether the labels on the cables that are connected to the GBAM to be replaced

are legible. If the labels are not legible, attach a new label to the cables to avoidimproper connection after replacing the GBAM.

5. Remove the power cable, PGND cable, and Ethernet cables from the GBAM to bereplaced.

6. Remove the screws fixing the GBAM to the rack.7. Remove the hangers from the GBAM to be replaced, and then install the hangers on

the new GBAM.8. Remove the GBAM from the cabinet along the guide rails.9. Place the new GBAM in the original position. Then, secure the screws.10. Connect the power cable, PGND cable, and Ethernet cables to the new GBAM.11. Turn on the power switch controlling the power supply to the GBAM on the power

distribution box. For distribution of the power switches, see labels on the front panelof the power distribution box, as shown in Figure 8-33.

12. Turn on the power switch on the front panel of the new GBAM.13. Check the items in Table 8-32.

Table 8-32 Checklist for GBAM replacement

Item Result Action

Whether the LEDs on thepanel show that the GBAM isin normal state. For details onthe LEDs, see Front Panel ofthe GBAM (IBM X3650T),Front Panel of the GBAM(HUAWEI C5210), and FrontPanel of the GBAM (HPCC3310).


No Rectify the fault byreferring to the usermanual of the GBAM.

Alarms related to the failure ofthe GBAM are cleared.




237

Item Result Action

No 1. Clear the alarms byreferring to thealarm online help onthe LMT.


Run the Ping command tocheck whether thecommunication between theGBAM and other computerson the same network segmentis normal.


No 1. Check whether theroute setting iscorrect. If the routesetting is incorrect,modify the routesetting.

2. If the route setting iscorrect, check theconnection of theEthernet cables.

Check whether the processesare normal.

Yes End the check.

No Restart the abnormalprocesses. If theproblem persists,contact Huawei fortechnical support.

l Replace the GBAM with an OMU board.

CAUTIONl Do not perform any operations that will modify the configuration data or the attributes

when replacing the GBAM.l Get a PC ready for file backup during the GBAM replacement.

1. The OMU board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, 20 to 23, or 24 to 27 in the MPS. Whenreplacing the GBAM with the OMU board, first log in the OMU and run the LSTBRD command to check whether there is a vacant slot for the OMU board. If there isno vacant slot for the OMU board, first modify the configuration data.

2. Collect the required information.

a. Run the DSP OMU command to obtain the computer name and external fixedIP address of the GBAM.



238

NOTEIf the external fixed IP address is not configured, its value is displayed as null. In this case,one must apply for an IP address that is in the same network segment as the external virtualIP address and use it as the external fixed IP address.

b. Run the LST VER command to obtain the version information about the GBAM.c. Run the Linux OS command route to obtain the external mask and gateway IP

address of the GBAM.d. Run the Linux OS command ps -afx to obtain the common directory and active

workspace directory of the OMU.3. Obtain the version software based on the version information obtained in step 2.2.4. Back up the data on the GBAM.

a. Create a backup directory on the hard disk that has at least 1 GB free space onthe PC. The backup directory is used to back up the data on the GBAM. Then,create subdirectories common, data, license, DefaultMeas, cert, and bin underthe backup directory.

b. Back up the reg.ini file in the common directory of the OMU to the backup/common directory of the PC.

c. Run the BKP DB command to back up the OMU databases. The backupdatabases are stored in /data/backup of the OMU active workspace directory.Then, back up the files in /data/backup of the OMU active workspace directoryto the backup/data directory of the PC.

d. Back up the license files in the license of the OMU active workspace directoryto the backup/license directory of the PC.

e. Back up the performance task files in /ftp/DefaultMeas of the OMU activeworkspace directory to the backup/DefaultMeas directory of the PC.

f. Back up the certificate files in /ftp/cert of the OMU active workspace directoryto the backup/cert directory of the PC.

g. Back up the bin directory. To back up the bin directory, first run the Linux OScommand tar czvf bin.tgz bin/ in the OMU active workspace directory tocompress the bin directory. Then, back up the compressed bin.tgz file to thebackup/bin directory of the PC.

5. Shut down the GBAM to be replaced.

a. Log in to the GBAM as user root, and then run the Linux OS command /etc/rc.d/omud stop to stop all applications on the GBAM to be replaced.

b. Run the Linux OS command poweroff to shut down the GBAM to be replaced.c. Turn off SW3 and SW6 on the power distribution box that control the power

supply to the GBAM to be replaced. Figure 8-33 shows the labels for the powerswitches on the front panel of the power distribution box.

6. Remove the GBAM.

a. Remove the power cable, PGND cable, and Ethernet cables from the GBAM tobe replaced.

b. Remove the screws fixing the GBAM to the rack. Then, remove the hangers fromthe GBAM to be replaced.

c. Remove the GBAM from the cabinet along the guide rails.7. Installing the OMU/SAU Boards8. Installing the OMU Applications in the Active Workspace



239

9. Modify the external fixed IP address, mask, gateway IP address, and computer nameof the OMU by using the omutool. For details, see Changing IP Addresses of OMUEthernet Adapters and Their Subnet Masks and Changing the Computer Name.

10. Recover the data.

a. Recover the reg.ini file by first deleting the reg.ini file in the /mbsc/bam/common/ directory of the OMU and then uploading the reg.ini file in the backup/common directory of the PC to the /mbsc/bam/common/ directory of the OMU.

b. Recover the license files by uploading the license files in the backup/licensedirectory of the PC to the /mbsc/bam/version_a/license directory of the OMU.

c. Recover the performance task files by uploading the files in the backup/DefaultMeas directory of the PC to the /mbsc/bam/version_a/ftp/DefaultMeas directory of the OMU.

d. Recover the license files by uploading the files in the backup/cert directory ofthe PC to the /mbsc/bam/version_a/ftp/cert directory of the OMU.

e. Recover the bin directory.– Run the Linux OS command mv /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin /mbsc/bam/

version_a/binbak to change the name of the bin directory in the /mbsc/bam/version_a directory to binbak.

– Upload the bin.tgz file in the backup/bin directory of the PC to the /mbsc/bam/version_a directory of the OMU.

– Run the Linux OS command tar xzvf bin.tgz to decompress the bin directory.– Run the Linux OS command rm -fr /mbsc/bam/version_a/binbak to delete

the binbak directory.f. Recover the OMU databases.

– Upload the files in the backup/data directory of the PC to the OMU.– Recover the OMU data by using the omu_backup_linker tool. For details, see

Restoring System Data.11. Run the Linux OS command /etc/rc.d/omud start to start the OMU services.12. Log in the OMU and run the DSP OMU command to check the status and IP addresses

of the new board.13. Run the DSP OMUMODULE command to check the status of OMU services.14. Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the OMU board.15. After the OMU board works normally, run the ADD BRD command to add the

configuration data of the OMU board.16. Run the SET SCUPORT command to disable ports 10 and 11 on the SCUa board in

subrack 0.



240

NOTEThe procedure for switching over the OMU from single-server mode to dual-server mode is different indifferent scenarios:

l Deployment of a new BSC6900: See Setting the OMU Working Mode in BSC6900 GU OMUAdministration Guide.

l Upgrade from BSC6000 to BSC6900: See Setting the OMU Working Mode in BSC6900 GU OMUAdministration Guide.

l Upgrade from BSC6810 to BSC6900: See Setting the OMU Working Mode in BSC6900 GU OMUAdministration Guide.

----End



241

9 Replacing the Cables

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to replace the Ethernet cable, E1/T1 cable, optical cable, clock signalcable, cable to the alarm box, and power distribution box monitoring cable. This chapter alsodescribes how to check that the cables are successfully replaced and how to handle the faultycables.

ContextThe requirements of installing the signal cables see the Principles of Installing the Signal Cables.

9.1 Replacing a Power CableThis section describes how to replace a power cable. It takes about 10 minutes to replace a powercable in overhead mode and about 30 minutes to replace a power cable in underfloor mode.

9.2 Replacing an E1/T1 CableThis section describes how to replace an E1/T1 cable of the BSC6900. The cable consists of theY-shaped 75-ohm coaxial cable and Y-shaped 120-ohm twisted pair cable. It takes about 10minutes to replace an E1/T1 cable.

9.3 Replacing an Optical CableThis section describes how to replace an optical cable. The BSC6900 optical cables are LC/PC-SC/PC single mode optical cable, LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable, LC/PC-FC/PC singlemode optical cable, LC/PC-FC/PC multi-mode optical cable, LC/PC-LC/PC single mode opticalcable, and LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable. It takes about five minutes to replace thecable.

9.4 Replacing an Ethernet CableThis section describes how to replace an Ethernet cable. It takes 5 to 20 minutes to replace anEthernet cable.

9.5 Replacing a Clock Signal CableThis section describes how to replace a clock signal cable. It takes five to twenty minutes toreplace a clock signal cable depending on the installation position of the reference clock.

9.6 Replacing a Y-Shaped Clock CableThis section describes how to replace a Y-shaped clock cable. It takes about 5 to 20 minutes toreplace a Y-shaped clock cable, depending on the installation position of the Y-shaped clockcable.

BSC6900 GUSite Maintenance Guide 9 Replacing the Cables


242

9.7 Replacing an Inter-TNUa CableThis section describes how to replace an inter-TNUa cable. It takes five to twenty minutes toreplace an inter-TNUa cable depending on the installation position.

9.8 Replacing an EMU RS485 Communication CableThis section describes how to replace the RS485 communication cable. It takes about fiveminutes to replace the RS485 communication cable.

9.9 Replacing a Signal Cable to the Alarm BoxThis section describes how to replace a signal cable connected to the alarm box. It takes five totwenty minutes to replace a signal cable depending on the installation position of the alarm box.

9.10 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution BoxThis section describes how to replace a monitoring cable of the power distribution box. It takesabout 10 minutes to replace a monitoring cable.

9.11 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan SubrackThis section describes how to replace a monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.It takes about 10 minutes to replace a monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.

9.12 Replacing an SFP+ High-Speed CableThis section describes how to replace an SFP+ high-speed cable. It takes about 10 minutes toreplace an SFP+ high-speed cable.



243

9.1 Replacing a Power CableThis section describes how to replace a power cable. It takes about 10 minutes to replace a powercable in overhead mode and about 30 minutes to replace a power cable in underfloor mode.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. The tools are the diagonal pliers, wrench, medium-size flat-head

screwdriver, large-size Phillips screwdriver, and socket wrench.l The required materials are ready, including cable ties or wax strings.l The backup power cable is ready.

Context



l Replacing the power cable between the PDF and the power distribution box may affect thesystem operation. If the single-input external power is supplied, the replacement causes thesystem to power off, therefore disrupting the services carried on the system. If the dual-inputexternal power is supplied, the replacement does not affect the system operation, but triggersa power failure alarm.

l Replacing the power cable between the power distribution box and the subrack may affectthe system operation. If the single-input power is supplied, the replacement causes thesubrack to power off, therefore disrupting the services of the subrack. If the dual-input poweris supplied, the replacement does not affect the system operation.

l Replacing the power cable between the power distribution box and the independent fansubrack may affect the system operation. If the single-input power is supplied, thereplacement causes the independent fan subrack to power off, therefore disrupting theservices of the independent fan subrack. If the dual-input power is supplied, the replacementdoes not affect the system operation.

l Before replacing a power cable, check the power supply mode (for example, single input ordual input) of the power cable. In the case of single input, be well prepared for the possibleservice interruption.

Lay power cables or install power cables by referring to Installing the Power Cables and PGNDCables.

Procedure

Step 1 Check the quantity, length, and type of the -48 V power cables and GND cables to be replaced.Ensure that the backup -48 V cables and GND cables are of the proper length and type. Ensurethat the power cable connectors are available.



244

Step 2 Attach temporary labels to the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable for easy identification.

The content on the temporary label should be consistent with the content on the engineeringlabel of the power cable to be replaced.

Step 3 Set switches SW1 to SW6, as described in Table 9-1.

Table 9-1 Setting switches SW1 to SW6

Type of Power Cableto Be Replaced

External Power SupplyMode

Operation

Power cable betweenthe PDF and the powerdistribution box

Single input Record the states of the switchesfor power output and turn off allthe switches that are ON.

Dual input/double dual inputs Record the states of the switchesfor power output and turn off theswitch that controls the -48 Vpower cable to be replaced.

Power cable betweenthe power distributionbox and the subrack

Single input/dual input Record the states of the switchesfor power output and turn off theswitch that controls the -48 Vpower cable to be replaced.

Power cable betweenthe power distributionbox and the independentfan subrack

Single input/dual input Record the states of the switchesfor power output and turn off theswitch that controls the -48 Vpower cable to be replaced.

Step 4 To replace the power cable between the PDF and the power distribution box, set the switch onthe DC PDF that controls the power supply of the cabinet to OFF, and then disconnect the inputpower of the power distribution box. To replace the power cable between the power distributionbox and the subrack/independent fan subrack, skip this step.

Step 5 Remove the original -48 V power cable and GND cable, and lay out the backup -48 V powercable and GND cable.

Step 6 Connect the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable to the corresponding ports.

Step 7 Replace the temporary labels on the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable with theengineering labels.

The content on the engineering label of the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable must beconsistent with the content on the engineering label of the original -48 V power cable and GNDcable. For details, see Attaching an Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.

Step 8 Bind the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable.

Step 9 Check whether the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable are correctly connected, and checkwhether a short-circuit occurs in the backup -48 V power cable and GND cable by using amultimeter.

Step 10 Set the switch that controls the power supply of the power distribution box on the PDF to ON.



245

Step 11 Set the switches whose original states are ON to ON according to the records in step 3.

Step 12 After replacing the power cable, check the items listed in Table 9-2.

Table 9-2 Checklist for power cable replacement

Item Result Action

Cable connection iscorrect.

Yes Go to the next item.

No Remove the power cable andreconnect it.

The connectors of thepower cable are properlyinserted into the port.


No Secure the connector.

Alarms related to thepower cable are cleared.




----End

Follow-up ProcedureDispose of the replaced power cable properly to prevent short-circuits and environmentalpollution.

9.2 Replacing an E1/T1 CableThis section describes how to replace an E1/T1 cable of the BSC6900. The cable consists of theY-shaped 75-ohm coaxial cable and Y-shaped 120-ohm twisted pair cable. It takes about 10minutes to replace an E1/T1 cable.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, flat-head screwdriver, and diagonal

pliers.l The required materials are ready, including cable ties or wax strings.l A new E1/T1 cable is ready.



246

Context


CAUTIONl Replacing the E1/T1 cable disrupts the services carried over the E1/T1 cable.

l If the BSC6900 and its peer end are connected through only the E1/T1 cable, all the servicesbetween the BSC6900 and its peer end are disrupted during the replacement.

Lay E1/T1 cables or install E1/T1 cables by referring to Installing the E1/T1 Cables.

Procedure

Step 1 Confirm the quantity, length, and type of the E1/T1 cables to be replaced. Arrange for a newE1/T1 cable with proper length and type. Note that extra length should be reserved.

Step 2 Add a connector for the DDF to the new E1/T1 cable.

Step 3 Attach temporary labels to the new E1/T1 cable. The content on the temporary label should beconsistent with the content on the original label.

NOTE

To facilitate the routing of E1/T1 cables in real situations, you may have to remove the side doors and reardoor of the cabinet. Install the removed doors after arranging the E1/T1 cables.

Step 4 Lay out the new E1/T1 cable along the original routing, or according to the new routingrequirements on site.

Step 5 On the BSC6900 side, remove the fastening screws on both ends of the E1/T1 cable withoutusing any tools. Then, disconnect the E1/T1 cable to be replaced from the BSC6900 and theDDF respectively.

Step 6 Connect the new E1/T1 cable without using any tools to the original ports on the BSC6900 andthe DDF.

Step 7 Replace the temporary labels on the new cable with the engineering labels.

The content on the engineering label of the new E1/T1 cable must be identical with the contenton the engineering label of the original E1/T1 cable. For details, see Attaching an EngineeringLabel to a Signal Cable.

Step 8 Bind the new E1/T1 cables.

Step 9 After replacing the E1/T1 cable, check the following item listed in Table 9-3.



247

Table 9-3 Checklist for E1/T1 cable replacement

Item Result Action



No Remove the E1/T1 cable andreconnect it.

The connectors of theE1/T1 cable areproperly inserted intothe ports.



Alarms related totransmission cable arecleared.

Yes End the check.

No 1. Clear the alarms by referringto the alarm online help onthe LMT.

2. If the alarms persist, contactHuawei for technicalsupport.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureDispose of the replaced E1/T1 cable properly to prevent short circuit and environmentalpollution.

9.3 Replacing an Optical CableThis section describes how to replace an optical cable. The BSC6900 optical cables are LC/PC-SC/PC single mode optical cable, LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable, LC/PC-FC/PC singlemode optical cable, LC/PC-FC/PC multi-mode optical cable, LC/PC-LC/PC single mode opticalcable, and LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable. It takes about five minutes to replace thecable.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, dustfree cotton cloth, fiber cleaner,

and diagonal pliers.l The materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.l A new optical cable is ready.l Confirm the quantity, length, and type of optical cables to be replaced.



248

Context


CAUTIONl When replacing the optical cable, invisible laser radiation might be emitted from

disconnected fibers or optical connectors. Do not stare into the beams or view directly withoptical instruments to prevent eye damages.

l When the BSC6900 and other NEs are connected in optical port backup mode, replacing oneoptical cable does not affect services of the system. Otherwise, replacing an optical cabledisrupts all the services carried on that cable.

l When the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected through only the optical cable, allservices between them are disrupted during the replacement.

Lay optical cables or install optical cables by referring to Installing the Optical Cables.

Procedure

Step 1 Attach temporary labels to the new cable for easy identification. It is recommended that contentof the temporary label be consistent with that of the original label.

Step 2 Lay out the new optical cable according to the original routing or according to the new routingrequirements on site.

Step 3 Remove the optical cable to be replaced.

If... Then...

The connector type is LC/PC or SC/PC. Press the tab on the connector and remove thecable.

The connector type is FC/PC, Unscrew the optical connector counterclockwise.

NOTE

If the removed optical cable is not damaged, cap the connector. If the connectors are dirty, clean them withthe dustfree cotton cloth or the fiber cleaner.

Step 4 Remove the dustproof cap from the optical connector and reserve the cap for later use. Connectthe new cable to the original ports.



249

CAUTIONFor the LC/PC, SC/PC or FC/PC connector, the TX end and the RX end must be connectedcorrectly by referring to the temporary label. Otherwise, the signal cannot be received ortransmitted.

Step 5 Replace the temporary labels on the new cable with the engineering labels. Content of theengineering label must be consistent with that of the temporary label. For details, see Attachingan Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.

Step 6 Bind the new optical cable.


Table 9-4 Checklist for optical cable replacement

Item Result Action



No Remove the cable and reconnect it.

The connectors ofthe optical cable areproperly insertedinto the port.



Alarms related to thetransmission cableare cleared.

Yes End the check.

NoClear these alarms by referring to the alarm onlinehelp on the LMT. If the faults persist, contactHuawei for technical support.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureDispose of the replaced optical cables to prevent environmental pollution.

9.4 Replacing an Ethernet CableThis section describes how to replace an Ethernet cable. It takes 5 to 20 minutes to replace anEthernet cable.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Ethernet cable meter, Ethernet cable

pliers, and diagonal pliers.

l The materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.

l A new Ethernet cable is ready.



250

Context


CAUTIONl Replacing the Ethernet cables to the LMT disrupts the communication between the LMT PC

and the OMU.

l The Port Trunking function is used in the interconnection ports on the inter-subrack SCUaboard. Replacing one Ethernet cable has no adverse effect on the system.

l For the FG2a board, if the BSC6900 is connected to the peer equipment through only theEthernet cable, services carried between the BSC6900 and the peer equipment are disruptedduring the replacement of the Ethernet cable.

l The OMUa board is configured with a pair of Ethernet cables. Replacing one of them has noadverse impact on the system.

l Confirm the quantity, length, and type of the Ethernet cables to be replaced. The Ethernetcables from different manufacturers differ in color and diameter. The new Ethernet cableshould be compatible with the cable to be replaced.

l Lay Ethernet cables or install Ethernet cables by referring to Installing the Ethernet Cables.

Procedure

Step 1 Arrange for a new Ethernet cable with proper length and type. Note that extra length should bereserved.

Step 2 Assemble the shielded RJ45 connector the unshielded RJ45 connector and the Ethernet cableaccording to the actual requirements by referring to Assembling the Shielded RJ45 Connectorand the Ethernet Cable or Assembling the Unshielded RJ45 Connector and the Ethernet Cable,and then check the appearance of metal contact strips and test the connection of assembled cablesby referring to Checking the Appearance of Metal Contact Strips and Testing the Connection ofAssembled Cables.

Step 3 Attach temporary labels to the new cable for clear identification.It is recommended that the content of the temporary label be consistent with that of the old label.

Step 4 Lay out the new Ethernet cable according to the original or on-site routing requirements.

Step 5 Disconnect the Ethernet cable to be replaced from the ports.

Step 6 Connect the new Ethernet cable to the original ports.

Step 7 Replace the temporary labels on the new cable with the engineering labels



251

Content of the engineering label must be consistent with that of the temporary label. For details,see Attaching an Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.

Step 8 Bind the new Ethernet cable with cable ties.


Table 9-5 Checklist for Ethernet cable replacement

Item Result Action




The connectors of thecable are properlyinserted into the port.



Alarms related tonetworkcommunications arecleared.


NoClear these alarms by referring to the alarmonline help on the LMT. If the faults persist,contact Huawei for technical support.

Two ends connected bythe cable can properlycommunicate witheach other after thePing command isexecuted in DOSmode.

Yes End the check.

No Check the cable connection. If the cableconnection is faulty, replace it with a new one.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureDispose of the replaced Ethernet cable to prevent environmental pollution.

9.5 Replacing a Clock Signal CableThis section describes how to replace a clock signal cable. It takes five to twenty minutes toreplace a clock signal cable depending on the installation position of the reference clock.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap and diagonal pliers.l The materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.l A new clock signal cable is ready.



252

Context


Lay clock signal cables or install clock signal cables by referring to Installing the Clock SignalCables.

Procedure

Step 1 Attach temporary labels to the new cable for easy identification. It is recommended that contentof the temporary label be identical with that of the old label.

Step 2 Lay out the new clock signal cable according to the original routing or according to the newrouting requirements on site.

Step 3 Disconnect the clock signal cable from the port.

Step 4 Connect the new clock signal cable to the original ports.



Step 6 Bind the new clock signal cables.

Step 7 After replacing the clock signal cable, check the items in Table 9-6.

Table 9-6 Checklist for clock signal cable replacement

Item Result Action




The connectors of theclock signal cable areproperly inserted intothe ports.


No Secure the connectors.

Alarms related to theclock signal cable arecleared.

Yes End the check.

NoClear these alarms by referring to the alarm onlinehelp on the LMT. If the faults persist, contactHuawei for technical support.

----End



253

Follow-up ProcedureDispose of the replaced clock signal cable to prevent environmental pollution.

9.6 Replacing a Y-Shaped Clock CableThis section describes how to replace a Y-shaped clock cable. It takes about 5 to 20 minutes toreplace a Y-shaped clock cable, depending on the installation position of the Y-shaped clockcable.

Prerequisitesl The tools and items required for replacing a Y-shaped clock cable are ready. The tools and

items are ESD wrist strap and diagonal pliers.l The required materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.l A new Y-shaped clock cable is ready.

Context


CAUTIONReplacing the Y-shaped clock cable triggers a clock alarm and leads to a failover of the SCUa.

Lay Y-shaped clock cables or install Y-shaped clock cables by referring to Installing the Y-Shaped Clock Cables.

Procedure

Step 1 Confirm the number, length, and type of the clock cables to be replaced. Attach temporary labelsto the new cables to distinguish them from others. The content on the temporary label should beidentical to the content on the engineering label of the Y-shaped clock cable to be replaced.

Step 2 Ensure that the Y-shaped clock cable is connected to an SCUa in standby mode. Before replacingthe Y-shaped clock cable connecting to the active SCUa, switch the SCUa from the active stateto the standby state.

Step 3 Disconnect the Y-shaped clock cable from the ports.

Step 4 Lay out the new Y-shaped clock cable according to the original route.

Step 5 Connect the new Y-shaped clock cable to the original ports.



254

Step 6 Replace the temporary label on the new cable with the engineering label.

The content on the engineering label of the new Y-shaped clock cable must be identical to thecontent on the engineering label of the original Y-shaped clock cable. For details, see Attachingan Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.

Step 7 Bind the new Y-shaped clock cable.

Step 8 After replacing the Y-shaped clock cable, check the items listed in Table 9-7.

Table 9-7 Checklist for the new Y-shaped clock cable

Item Result Action

Check whether thephysical connection iscorrect.


No Remove the Y-shaped clock cableand reconnect it.

Check whether theconnector of the Y-shaped clock cable isproperly inserted into theport.


No Secure the insertion.

Check whether alarmsrelated to the clock cableare cleared.

Yes End the check.

No 1. Handle the alarm by referring tothe alarm help information on theLMT.

2. If the alarms persist, contactHuawei Customer ServiceCenter.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

Dispose of the replaced Y-shaped clock cable in an environment-friendly way.

9.7 Replacing an Inter-TNUa CableThis section describes how to replace an inter-TNUa cable. It takes five to twenty minutes toreplace an inter-TNUa cable depending on the installation position.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready, including the ESD wrist strap, flat-head screwdriver, and diagonal

pliers.

l The required materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.

l A new inter-TNUa cable is ready.



255

Context


CAUTIONReplacing the inter-TNUa cable disrupts the TDM switching services between the two subracksthat are connected by the inter-TNUa cable.

Lay inter-TNUa cables or install inter-TNUa cables by referring to Installing the Inter-TNUaCables.

Procedure

Step 1 Confirm the quantity, length, and type of the inter-TNUa cables to be replaced. Attach temporarylabels to the new cables for easy identification.

The content on the temporary label should be identical with the content on the engineering labelof the inter-TNUa cable to be replaced.

Step 2 Remove the fastening screws from the inter-TNUa cable connector without using any tools, andthen remove the cable.

Step 3 Lay out the new inter-TNUa cable according to the original routing, or according to the newrouting requirements on site.

Step 4 Connect the new inter-TNUa cable to the original ports without using any tools.

Step 5 Replace the temporary labels on the new inter-TNUa cable with the engineering labels.

The content on the engineering label of the new inter-TNUa cable must be identical with thecontent on the engineering label of the original inter-TNUa cable. For details, see Attaching anEngineering Label to a Signal Cable.

Step 6 Bind the new inter-TNUa cable.

Step 7 After replacing the inter-TNUa cable, check the items listed in Table 9-8.

Table 9-8 Checklist for inter-TNUa cable replacement

Item Result Action



No Remove the inter-TNUa cableand reconnect it.



256

Item Result Action

The connectors of thecable are properlyinserted into the port.



Alarms related totransmission cablesare cleared.

Yes End the check.


2. If the alarms persist, contactHuawei for technical support.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

Dispose of the replaced inter-TNUa cable to prevent short circuit and environmental pollution.

9.8 Replacing an EMU RS485 Communication CableThis section describes how to replace the RS485 communication cable. It takes about fiveminutes to replace the RS485 communication cable.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready, including the ESD gloves, diagonal pliers, and flat-head screwdriver.

l The required materials are ready, including cable ties or wax strings.

l A new RS485 communication cable is ready.

Context




Lay RS485 communication cables or install RS485 communication cables by referring toInstalling the EMU RS485 Communication Cables.



257

Procedure

Step 1 Lay out the new signal cable according to the original routing, or according to the new routingrequirements on site.

Step 2 On the EMU side, remove the DB9 male connector on one end of the EMU RS485communication cable from the DB9 female socket on the EMU.

Step 3 On the BSC6900 side, remove the RJ45 connector on the other end of the EMU RS485communication cable from the J1 port on the power distribution box of the BSC6900 cabinet.

Step 4 According to the original cable positions, connect a new RS485 communication cable to theEMU and the power distribution box.

Step 5 Attach engineering labels to the new RS485 communication cable. For details, see Attaching anEngineering Label to a Signal Cable.

The content on the engineering label of the new RS485 communication cable must be identicalwith that on the engineering label of the original RS485 communication cable.

Step 6 Power on the EMU.

Step 7 Test the EMU by referring to the manual delivered with the EMU.

Step 8 If the LEDs on the front panel of the EMU indicate abnormal communication on the serial port,check the connection.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureDispose of the replaced RS485 communication cable properly to prevent environmentalpollution.

9.9 Replacing a Signal Cable to the Alarm BoxThis section describes how to replace a signal cable connected to the alarm box. It takes five totwenty minutes to replace a signal cable depending on the installation position of the alarm box.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD gloves, ESD wrist strap, and diagonal pliers.l The materials are ready. The materials are cable ties.l A new signal cable is ready.



258

Context




CAUTIONCommunication between the alarm box and the LMT PC is disrupted during the replacement.

Procedure

Step 1 Lay out the new signal cable according to the original routing or according to the new routingrequirements on site.

Step 2 Loosen the DB9/DB25 connector and then remove the signal cable from the LMT that reportsalarms.

Step 3 On the alarm box side, power off the alarm box, unlock the alarm box, remove the front panel,and then disconnect the signal cable.

Step 4 Connect the new signal cable to the LMT PC and the alarm box by referring to the originalconnection of the signal cable.

Step 5 Reinstall the front panel and lock the alarm box.

Step 6 Attach engineering labels to the new signal cable. The content of the new label must be the sameas the content of the old one.

Step 7 Power on the alarm box.

Step 8 Test the alarm box by referring to the manual delivered with the alarm box.

Step 9 If the LEDs on the front panel of the alarm box indicate abnormal communication on the serialport, check the connection.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureDispose of the replaced signal cable properly to prevent environmental pollution.



259

9.10 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for the PowerDistribution Box

This section describes how to replace a monitoring cable of the power distribution box. It takesabout 10 minutes to replace a monitoring cable.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strip, diagonal pliers, and Phillips

screwdriver.l The materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.l A new monitoring cable is ready.

Context


Procedure

Step 1 Attach temporary labels to the new cable for easy identification. It is recommended that contentof the temporary label be consistent with that of the old label.

Step 2 Lay out the monitoring cable.

Step 3 Remove the monitoring cable to be replaced from the port.

Step 4 Connect the new monitoring cable to the original ports.



Step 6 Bind the monitoring cable.

Step 7 After replacing the monitoring cable of the power distribution box, check the items in Table9-9.

Table 9-9 Checklist for monitoring cable replacement

Item Result Action

Cable connection iscorrect. Yes Check the next item.



260

Item Result Action

No Remove the monitoring cable and connect thecable again.

The connectors of themonitoring cable areproperly inserted intothe port.



LEDs on the panelproperly indicate therunning of powerdistribution box.


No Contact Huawei for technical support.

Alarms related to themonitoring cable arecleared.

Yes End the check.

NoClear these alarms by referring to the alarmonline help on the LMT. If the faults persist,contact Huawei for technical support.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureDispose of the replaced monitoring cable to prevent environmental pollution.

9.11 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for theIndependent Fan Subrack

This section describes how to replace a monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.It takes about 10 minutes to replace a monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strip, diagonal pliers, and Phillips

screwdriver.

l The materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.

l A new monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack is ready.

Context




261

Procedure

Step 1 Attach temporary labels to the new cable for easy identification. It is recommended that contentof the temporary label be identical with that of the old label.

Step 2 Lay out the new monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.

Step 3 Disconnect the monitoring signal cable to be replaced from the port.

Step 4 Connect the new monitoring signal cable to the corresponding port.


The content of the engineering label must be consistent with that of the temporary label. Fordetails, see Attaching an Engineering Label to a Signal Cable.

Step 6 Bind the monitoring signal cable to other cables.

Step 7 After replacing the monitoring signal cable, check the items in Table 9-10.

Table 9-10 Checklist for monitoring signal cable replacement

Item Result Action



No Remove the monitoring signal cable and connectthe cable again.

The connectors of themonitoring signal cableare securely connectedto the ports.


No Secure the connectors of the monitoring signalcable.

The LEDs on the panelof the independent fansubrack correctlyindicate the state of thefan box.


No Contact Huawei for technical support.

Alarms related to themonitoring signal cableare cleared.

Yes End the check.

NoClear the alarms by referring to the alarm onlinehelp on the LMT. If the alarms persist, contactHuawei for technical support.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureDispose of the replaced monitoring signal cable properly to prevent environmental pollution.

9.12 Replacing an SFP+ High-Speed CableThis section describes how to replace an SFP+ high-speed cable. It takes about 10 minutes toreplace an SFP+ high-speed cable.



262

Prerequisitesl The tools are ready. They are the ESD wrist strap, the ESD box or bag, and the diagonal

pliers.

l A new SFP+ high-speed cable is ready.

Context


For details on how to install SFP+ high-speed cables, see Installing the Inter-SCUb SFP+ High-Speed Cables Between Different Subracks.

Procedure

Step 1 Confirm the quantity, length, and type of the SFP+ high-speed cables to be replaced. Attachtemporary label to the new cable for easy identification. The content on the temporary labelshould be consistent with that on the engineering label of the SFP+ high-speed cable to bereplaced.

Step 2 Confirm that the SCUb whose SFP+ high-speed cable is to be replaced works in standby mode.If the SCUb works in active mode, perform active/standby switchover on the SCUb boards.

Step 3 Pull out the connector of the SFP+ high-speed cable to be replaced from where it is inserted bythe handle, as shown in Figure 9-1.

Figure 9-1 SFP+ High-Speed Cable

Step 4 Lay out the new SFP+ high-speed cable according to the original routing.

Step 5 Connect the new SFP+ high-speed cable to the corresponding ports.

Step 6 Replace the temporary label on the new SFP+ high-speed cable with the engineering label.

The content on the engineering label must be consistent with that on the engineering label of theoriginal SFP+ high-speed cable. For details, see Attaching an Engineering Label to a SignalCable.

Step 7 Bind the new SFP+ high-speed cable.

Step 8 After replacing the SFP+ high-speed cable, check the items listed in Table 9-11.



263

Table 9-11 Checklist for SFP+ high-speed cable replacement

Item Result Action



No Remove the SFP+ high-speedcable and reconnect it.

The connector of theSFP+ high-speed cableis properly insertedinto the port.



Alarms related totransmission cables arecleared.

Yes End the check.


2. If the alarms persist, contactHuawei for technicalsupport.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureDispose of the replaced SFP+ high-speed cable to prevent short circuit and environmentalpollution.



264

10 LEDs on the Boards

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.

10.1 LEDs on the AEUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the AEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

10.2 LEDs on the AOUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the AOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

10.3 LEDs on the AOUc BoardThere are four types of LEDs on the AOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

10.4 LEDs on the DPUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

10.5 LEDs on the DPUb BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUb board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

10.6 LEDs on the DPUc BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

10.7 LEDs on the DPUd BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

10.8 LEDs on the DPUe BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUe board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

10.9 LEDs on the EIUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

10.10 LEDs on the FG2a BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2aboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

10.11 LEDs on the FG2c BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2cboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

BSC6900 GUSite Maintenance Guide 10 LEDs on the Boards


265

10.12 LEDs on the FG2d BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2d board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2dboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

10.13 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa BoardThere are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

10.14 LEDs on the GOUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

10.15 LEDs on the GOUc BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),and ACT (optical port LED).

10.16 LEDs on the GOUd BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the GOUd board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),and ACT (optical port LED).

10.17 LEDs on the MDMC BoardThere are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.

10.18 LEDs on the NIUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the NIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

10.19 LEDs on the OIUa BoardThere are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

10.20 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, andHD.

10.21 LEDs on the PAMU BoardThere are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.

10.22 LEDs on the PEUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

10.23 LEDs on the POUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the POUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

10.24 LEDs on the POUc BoardThere are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

10.25 LEDs on the SAUa BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the SAUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, HD, and OFFLINE.

10.26 LEDs on the SAUc BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the SAUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, HDD, and OFL.

10.27 LEDs on the SCUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUaboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

10.28 LEDs on the SCUb BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SCUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUbboard, LINK and ACT indicate the status of each 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet port, and 10GLINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port.



266

10.29 LEDs on the SPUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUbboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

10.30 LEDs on the SPUb BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUbboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

10.31 LEDs on the TNUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

10.32 LEDs on the UOIa BoardThere are three LEDs on the UOIa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

10.33 LEDs on the UOIc BoardThere are four types of LEDs on the UOIc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.



267

10.1 LEDs on the AEUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the AEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 10-1 describes the LEDs on the AEUa board.

Table 10-1 LEDs on the AEUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

10.2 LEDs on the AOUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the AOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 10-2 describes the LEDs on the AOUa board.

Table 10-2 LEDs on the AOUa board











268





10.3 LEDs on the AOUc BoardThere are four types of LEDs on the AOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 10-3 describes the LEDs on the AOUc board.

Table 10-3 LEDs on the AOUc board

LED Color

Status Description

RUN Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s






ACT Green

ON The board is in active mode.


LOS Green

ON The STM-1 port does not receivesignals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signalsproperly.

10.4 LEDs on the DPUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 10-4 describes the LEDs on the DPUa board.



269

Table 10-4 LEDs on the DPUa board










ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it isabnormal.

10.5 LEDs on the DPUb BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUb board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 10-5 describes the LEDs on the DPUb board.

Table 10-5 LEDs on the DPUb board














270

10.6 LEDs on the DPUc BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 10-6 describes the LEDs on the DPUc board.

Table 10-6 LEDs on the DPUc board






ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.




OFF The board is loading software orit is abnormal.

10.7 LEDs on the DPUd BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 10-7 describes the LEDs on the DPUd board.

Table 10-7 LEDs on the DPUd board


RUN Green ON for 1s and OFFfor 1s


ON for 0.125s andOFF for 0.125s






271





OFF The board is loading software or itis abnormal.

10.8 LEDs on the DPUe BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUe board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 10-8 describes the LEDs on the DPUe board.

Table 10-8 LEDs on the DPUe board












10.9 LEDs on the EIUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 10-9 describes the LEDs on the EIUa board.



272

Table 10-9 LEDs on the EIUa board












10.10 LEDs on the FG2a BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2aboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

Table 10-10 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.

Table 10-10 LEDs on the FG2a board


RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.


The board is in loadingstate.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.



ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.



273


LINK (at theEthernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at theEthernet port)

Green OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.

Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.

10.11 LEDs on the FG2c BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2cboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

Table 10-11 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.

Table 10-11 LEDs on the FG2c board















Orange OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.



274



10.12 LEDs on the FG2d BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2d board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2dboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

Table 10-12 describes the LEDs on the FG2d board.

Table 10-12 LEDs on the FG2d board















Orange OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.


10.13 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa BoardThere are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.



275

Table 10-13 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 10-13 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board












10.14 LEDs on the GOUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 10-14 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.

Table 10-14 LEDs on the GOUa board












276



10.15 LEDs on the GOUc BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),and ACT (optical port LED).

Table 10-15 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.

Table 10-15 LEDs on the GOUc board











LINK (opticalport LED)



ACT (opticalport LED)



10.16 LEDs on the GOUd BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the GOUd board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),and ACT (optical port LED).



277

Table 10-16 describes the LEDs on the GOUd board.

Table 10-16 LEDs on the GOUd board











LINK (opticalport LED)



ACT (opticalport LED)



10.17 LEDs on the MDMC BoardThere are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.

Table 10-17 describes the LEDs on the MDMC board.

Table 10-17 LEDs on the MDMC board



The MDMC board is functional andcommunicates with the SCUa/SCUbboard properly.


The MDMC board is not working or itdoes not communicate with the SCUa/SCUb board properly.



278


OFF The power supply to the MDMC boardis abnormal or the power distributionbox does not work properly.


ON The power distribution box is faulty.During the self-check of the MDMCboard, however, the ALM LED is alsoON. This indicates that the ALM LEDis functional.

10.18 LEDs on the NIUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the NIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 10-18 describes the LEDs on the NIUa board.

Table 10-18 LEDs on the NIUa board











OFF The board is in standby mode, or theboard is disconnected.

10.19 LEDs on the OIUa BoardThere are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 10-19 describes the LEDs on the OIUa board.



279

Table 10-19 LEDs on the OIUa board











LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receivesignals properly.


10.20 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, andHD.

Table 10-20 describes the LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board.

Table 10-20 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board




The board is being started.








280


OFF The board is in standby mode, or theboard is disconnected.

OFFLINE Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.


The board is being switched over tothe other working mode.

HD Green OFF There is no read or write operationon the hard disk.

Blinking The hard disk is being read orwritten to.

10.21 LEDs on the PAMU BoardThere are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.

Table 10-21 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.

Table 10-21 LEDs on the PAMU board



The PAMU board is functional andcommunicates with the SCUa/SCUbboard properly.


The PAMU board is faulty or it does notcommunicate with the SCUa/SCUbboard properly.

OFF The power supply to the PAMU boardis abnormal or the power distributionbox does not work properly.


ON The power distribution box is faulty.During the self-check of the PAMUboard, however, the ALM LED is alsoON. This indicates that the ALM LEDis functional.

10.22 LEDs on the PEUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.



281

Table 10-22 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.

Table 10-22 LEDs on the PEUa board











10.23 LEDs on the POUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the POUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 10-23 describes the LEDs on the POUa board.

Table 10-23 LEDs on the POUa board












282



10.24 LEDs on the POUc BoardThere are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 10-24 describes the LEDs on the POUc board.

Table 10-24 LEDs on the POUc board











LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receivesignals properly.


10.25 LEDs on the SAUa BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the SAUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, HD, and OFFLINE.

Table 10-25 describes the LEDs on the SAUa board.

Table 10-25 LEDs on the SAUa board





283







ON or blinking There is an alarm.


OFF The board is disconnected.

OFFLINE Blue ON The board can be removed.




HD Green OFF No data on the hard disk is beingread or written.

Blinking Data on the hard disk is being reador written.

10.26 LEDs on the SAUc BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the SAUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, HDD, and OFL.

Table 10-26 describes the LEDs on the SAUc board.

Table 10-26 LEDs on the SAUc board










284


ON or blinking There is an alarm.


OFF The board is disconnected.

OFL Blue ON The board can be removed.




HDD Green OFF No data on the hard disk is beingread or written.

Blinking Data on the hard disk is being reador written.

10.27 LEDs on the SCUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUaboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

Table 10-27 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board.

Table 10-27 LEDs on the SCUa board













285








10.28 LEDs on the SCUb BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SCUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUbboard, LINK and ACT indicate the status of each 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet port, and 10GLINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port.

Table 10-28 describes the LEDs on the SCUb board.

Table 10-28 LEDs on the SCUb board


















286



10G LINK Green ON The link is well connected.


10.29 LEDs on the SPUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUbboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

Table 10-29 describes the LEDs on the SPUa board.

Table 10-29 LEDs on the SPUa board















Green OFF There is no data transmission overthe Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over theEthernet port.



287

10.30 LEDs on the SPUb BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUbboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

Table 10-30 describes the LEDs on the SPUb board.

Table 10-30 LEDs on the SPUb board















Orange OFF There is no data transmission overthe Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over theEthernet port.

10.31 LEDs on the TNUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 10-31 describes the LEDs on the TNUa board.

Table 10-31 LEDs on the TNUa board





288




ON There is power supply,but the board is faulty.

OFF There is no powersupply, or the board isfaulty.





10.32 LEDs on the UOIa BoardThere are three LEDs on the UOIa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 10-32 describes the LEDs on the UOIa board.

Table 10-32 LEDs on the UOIa board













289

10.33 LEDs on the UOIc BoardThere are four types of LEDs on the UOIc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 10-33 describes the LEDs on the UOIc board.

Table 10-33 LEDs on the UOIc board

LED Color

Status Description

RUN Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.







ACT Green

ON The board is in active mode.


LOS Green

ON The STM-1 port does not receivesignals properly.




290

11 DIP Switches on Components

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.

11.1 DIP Switch on the SubrackThe DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

11.2 DIP Switches on the AEUa BoardThe AEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

11.3 DIP Switches on the AOUa BoardThe AOUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switchesare used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

11.4 DIP Switches on the EIUa BoardThe EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.

11.5 DIP Switch on the MDMC BoardThe MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.

11.6 DIP Switch on the PAMU BoardThe PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.

11.7 DIP Switches on the PEUa BoardThe PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

11.8 DIP Switch on the PFCU BoardThe PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIPswitch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in afan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU boardis configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

11.9 DIP Switches on the POUa BoardThe POUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switchesare used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

BSC6900 GUSite Maintenance Guide 11 DIP Switches on Components


291

11.1 DIP Switch on the SubrackThe DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

Location of the DIP SwitchThe DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of theDIP switch, see Components of the Subrack.

AppearanceFigure 11-1 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.

Figure 11-1 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack

Description about the DIP SwitchThe DIP switch on the subrack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. Table11-1 describes the bits.



292

Table 11-1 Description about the bits

Bit Description

1-5 Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is theleast significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bitis set to OFF, it indicates 1.

6 Odd parity check bit

7 Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON


Startup type of the subrack, generally set to OFFNOTEl For the inventory sites upgrading from BSC6000, BSC6810 to

BSC6900, keep the former settings.

l For the new sites in BSC6900, the bit is conservative and is fixed toOFF.

CAUTIONl You must set the DIP switch before powering on the subrack. The setting after the power-

on is invalid.

Principle of the DIP Switch Setting

As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an oddnumber. The method for setting the bits is as follows:

1. Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.

2. Set bit 7 to ON.

3. Set bit 8 to OFF.

4. Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch.

l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.

l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.

Table 11-2 describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.

Table 11-2 Setting of the DIP switch

SubrackNo.

Bit Setting of theDIP Switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF



293

SubrackNo.

Bit Setting of theDIP Switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

2 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF

4 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

ON ON OFF

ON ON OFF ON OFF

5 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

OFF ON OFF

ON ON ON ON OFF

11.2 DIP Switches on the AEUa BoardThe AEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

Layout of the DIP SwitchesFigure 11-2 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the AEUa board.



294

Figure 11-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the AEUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate



295

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottomplate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.

l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 11-2, there are twosquare holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Throughthe two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-board, and therefore you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 11-2 is toturn inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4,S6, or S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bitsof S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.

l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency betweenthe physical setting of S10 on the AEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting bycommand as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SETE1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support forbalanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you mustalso manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalancedmode.

l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxialcable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signalsare transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted paircable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

Description of the DIP Switches

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the AEUa board are used to enable or disable the groundingof 0 to 31 E1s/T1/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 11-3 describes S2, S4, S6,S8, and S10.

Table 11-3 Description of the DIP switches on the AEUa board

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting ofDIP Bit

Meaning

S2 1-8 TX ground switchof E1s/T1s/J1s 24to 31

ON Set the working modeto E1 unbalanced mode

OFF Set the working modeto other modes











296

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting ofDIP Bit

Meaning


S10 1-2 DIP switch forsetting theworking mode,consisting of twobits

(ON, ON) Set the working modeto E1 unbalanced mode

(OFF, ON) Set the working modeto E1 balanced mode

(ON, OFF) Set the working modeto T1 mode

(OFF, OFF) Set the working modeto J1 mode

11.3 DIP Switches on the AOUa BoardThe AOUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switchesare used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

Layout of the DIP SwitchesFigure 11-3 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the AOUa board.



297

Figure 11-3 Layout of the DIP switches on the AOUa board


CAUTIONAll DIP switches of the AOUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel isfaced to and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Description of the DIP Switches

Table 11-4 describes the DIP switches on the AOUa board.

Table 11-4 Description of the DIP switches on the AOUa board

DIP Switch Bit Setting ofDIP Bit

Meaning

S1 1-2 (ON, ON) Set loading mode to JTAG configuration

(OFF, OFF) Set loading mode to CPU slave parallelconfiguration



298

DIP Switch Bit Setting ofDIP Bit

Meaning

3 ON Set working mode to T1 mode

OFF Set working mode to E1 mode

4 ON Set the mapped path to AU3

OFF Set the mapped path to AU4

5 ON Set the information structure to TU11

OFF Set the information structure to TU12

6 ON SONET

OFF SDH

7 - Reserved

8 - Reserved

11.4 DIP Switches on the EIUa BoardThe EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.

Figure 11-4 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board.



299

Figure 11-4 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board


NOTE

l When the 75-ohm coaxial cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1 unbalanced mode. In thiscase, the TX end is grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to ON.

l When the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1(T1) balanced mode.In this case, the TX end is not grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to OFF.

l All DIP switches of the EIUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is faced toand combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Table 11-5 describes the DIP switches on the EIUa board.

Table 11-5 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm CoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwisted PairCable

S1 8 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s 0-7

ON OFF



300

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm CoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwisted PairCable

7 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s 8-15

ON OFF

6 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s16-23

ON OFF

5 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s24-31

ON OFF

1-4 Reserved - -

S3 1-8 TX groundswitch of E1s/T1s 0-7

ON OFF


ON OFF


ON OFF


ON OFF

Table 11-6 describes the different DIP switches.

Table 11-6 Description of the different DIP switches

DIP Switch Description

E1/T1 impedance selection switch Used to select the logical transmission mode of theboard and to notify the software of the currenttransmission mode

E1/T1 TX ground switch Used to control the grounding of the transmitting endof the E1/T1 signals



301

NOTE

l The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.

l The setting for the DIP switches on the active board must be the same as that for the DIP switcheson the standby board.

l The RX end is not grounded either in balanced or in unbalanced mode.

11.5 DIP Switch on the MDMC BoardThe MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.

Figure 11-5 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the MDMC board.

Figure 11-5 DIP switch on the MDMC board

With four bits, the DIP switch S4 is used to set the address of the MDMC board.

To set the address, first remove the MDMC board and then set S2 as described in Table 11-7.

Table 11-7 DIP switch on the MDMC board

Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

0 1 (the most significantbit)

ON 0

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the least significantbit)

ON 0

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the MDMC board must be set as described in Table 11-7.

11.6 DIP Switch on the PAMU BoardThe PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.

Figure 11-6 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.



302

Figure 11-6 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board

With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.

To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table11-8.

Table 11-8 DIP switch on the PAMU board

Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

0 1 (the most significantbit)

ON 0

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the least significantbit)

ON 0

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 11-8.

11.7 DIP Switches on the PEUa BoardThe PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

Figure 11-7 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.



303

Figure 11-7 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board




304

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottomplate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.

l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 11-7, there are twosquare holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Throughthe two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-board, and therefore you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 11-7 is toturn inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4,S6, or S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bitsof S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.

l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency betweenthe physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting bycommand as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SETE1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support forbalanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you mustalso manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalancedmode.

l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxialcable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signalsare transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted paircable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the groundingof 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 11-9 describes the DIPswitches on the PEUa board.

Table 11-9 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting of DIPSwitch

Meaning

S2 1-8 TX ground switch ofE1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31

ON Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode

OFF Setting theworking mode toother modes








305

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting of DIPSwitch

Meaning





S10 1-2 DIP switch for setting theworking mode,consisting of two bits

(ON, ON) Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode

(OFF, ON) Setting theworking mode toE1 balancedmode

(ON, OFF) Setting theworking mode toT1 mode

(OFF, OFF) Setting theworking mode toJ1 mode

11.8 DIP Switch on the PFCU BoardThe PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIPswitch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in afan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU boardis configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)Figure 11-8 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.



306

Figure 11-8 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described inTable 11-10. For how to remove the fan box, see 8.34 Replacing the Fan Box. After settingthe DIP switch, the address of the PFCU board is 1.

Table 11-10 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIPSwitch

Description


OFF 1

2 ON 0

3 ON 0


ON 0

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)Figure 11-9 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Figure 11-9 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described inTable 11-11. For how to remove the fan box, see 8.34 Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting,the address of the PFCU board is 4.



307

Table 11-11 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIPSwitch

Description


ON 0

2 ON 0

3 OFF 1


ON 0

NOTE

The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

11.9 DIP Switches on the POUa BoardThe POUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switchesare used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

Layout of the DIP SwitchesFigure 11-10 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the POUa board.



308

Figure 11-10 Layout of the DIP switches on the POUa board


CAUTIONAll the DIP switches on the POUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panelis faced to and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Description of the DIP SwitchesTable 11-12 describes the DIP switches on the POUa board.

Table 11-12 Description of the DIP switches on the POUa board

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Bit Meaning

S1 1-2 (ON, ON) Setting loading modeto JTAG configuration

(OFF, OFF) Setting loading modeto CPU slave parallelconfiguration



309

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Bit Meaning

3 ON Setting working modeto T1 mode

OFF Setting working modeto E1 mode

4 ON Setting the mappedpath to AU3

OFF Setting the mappedpath to AU4

5 ON Setting theinformation structureto TU11

OFF Setting theinformation structureto TU12

6 ON SONET

OFF SDH

7 - Reserved

8 - Reserved



310

12 BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record

This chapter describes the BSC6900 site maintenance record.

Table 12-1 presents the BSC6900 site maintenance record.

Table 12-1 BSC6900 site maintenance record

Site name: Maintenance Date:

Time of faultoccurring:

Time of fault clearing:

Maintenance type Operator:

Maintenance type □ Replacing a board □ Replacing a cable □ Replacing thesubrack, fan box,or powerdistribution box

□ Routine cleaning □ Expanding thesubrack

□ Others

Maintenanceoperations:

Commissioningresult:

BSC6900 GUSite Maintenance Guide 12 BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record


311

BSC6900 GU Site Maintenance Guide(V900R014C00_07)(PDF)-En

Documents